4G LTE SMARTPHONE
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone and keep it for future reference.
GH68-40457A Printed in Korea
Warning!
This product contains chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive toxicity.
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is
otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to,
accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal
laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or
unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of
authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights
secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you
will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of,
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the
Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the
Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code
covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and
other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under
the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com
.
TF_S890L_UM_English_NB2_PS_021814_F3
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of
Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON
THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES
NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR
QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT;
THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS
CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT
PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR
USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE
EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR
BENEFITS.
Modification of Software
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR
INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY
SETTINGS, OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM
SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR
DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR CARRIER
MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE,
SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a
Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party
security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes
field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing
which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the
security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing,
for example, includes field testing with local network connection and
menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in
conjunction with the Samsung device. For more information about
Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to
www.samsung.com/us/
safe
.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN
THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE FULL
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.,
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE
"SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR
APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In addition,
information technology security protection will be affected by
features or functionality associated with, among other things the e-
mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network
solutions selected by the software provider, solution provider or user.
Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private
network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider,
solution provider or user and any associated effect on information
technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the
software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement
of limited warranty, please refer to
www.samsung.com/us/safe
,
available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy
Tab™ devices are sold. [101212]
Samsung Telecommunications America
(STA), LLC
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
http://www.samsung.com
©
2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a
registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your S
amsung Mobile Device?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS
System (Automated Response System)
at:
www.samsung.com/us/support
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the
specified capacity because the operating system and default
applications occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may
change when you upgrade the device.
Nuance
®
, VSuite™, T9
®
Text Input, and the Nuance logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
ACCESS
®
and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks
of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and
combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card
Association.
Openwave
®
is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play,
Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Hangouts,
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
LTE is a trademark of ETS
I
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc.
©
2010
Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ....................................................8
Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removing the Battery Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installing the microSD Memory Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing the Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Replacing the Battery Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Charging the Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Extending Your Battery Life
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Switching the Device On or Off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Initial Device Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Restarting the Device
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Locking and Unlocking the Device
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Voicemail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Section 2: Understanding Your Device ..............................22
Features of Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Front View
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Back View
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Side Views
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Device Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Status Bar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Home Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Customizing the Screens
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Screen Navigation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using Motions and Gestures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Menu Navigation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts List ......................58
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Making a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Ending a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Making Emergency Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1
Dialing Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Answering a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Managing Reject Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
International Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Pause Dialing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Wait Dialing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Redialing the Last Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Speed Dialing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
In Call Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Logs Tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Section 4: Entering Text .....................................................83
Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Selecting the Text Input Method
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Entering Text Using Swype
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using the Samsung Keyboard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Using the Google Voice Typing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Section 5: Contacts ............................................................97
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Contacts List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Finding a Contact
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Contact List Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Contact Menu Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Contact Entry Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Linking Contact Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Sending a Namecard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Copying Contact Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Synchronizing Contacts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Display Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Additional Contact Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
The Favorites Tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2
Section 6: Messaging .......................................................126
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Creating and Sending Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Message Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Viewing Newly Received Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Deleting Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Message Search
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Messaging Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Assigning Messages as Spam
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Accessing Your Spam Folder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Text Templates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using Email
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Using Google Mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Section 7: Multimedia ......................................................164
Assigning the Default Storage Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Using the Camera
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Camera Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Quick Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Camera and Camcorder Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Using the Camcorder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Sharing Pictures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Editing a Photo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
The Gallery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Section 8: Applications and Development .......................192
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Calculator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Calendar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Camera
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
ChatON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Chrome
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
3
Contacts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Downloads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Email
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Gallery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Gmail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Google
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Google Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Google +
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Group Play
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Hangouts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Internet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Local
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Maps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Messaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Music
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Using Playlists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Transferring Music Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Removing Music Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
My Account Downloader
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
My Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Navigation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Phone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Photos
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Play Books
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Play Games
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Play Movies & TV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Play Music
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Play Newsstand
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Play Store
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Downloading a New Google Application
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
POLARIS
Office 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
S Memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4
S Translator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
S Voice
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Samsung Link
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Story Album
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Video
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Voice Recorder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Voice Search
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
WatchON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
YouTube
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Section 9: Connections .....................................................276
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Enable Downloading for Web Applications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
PC Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Wi-Fi
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Section 10: Changing Your Settings ................................289
Accessing the Settings Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Settings Tabs - Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Wi-Fi Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Bluetooth settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Data Usage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
More Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Lock Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Display Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
LED Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Sound Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Home Screen Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Call Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Blocking Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Hands-free Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Power Saving Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Accessory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Accessibility Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5
Language and Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Motions and Gestures Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Smart screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Voice control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Add Account
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Backup and Reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Location Services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Security
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Application Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Battery Usage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
SD Card & Device Storage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Date and Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
About Device
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Software Update
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Section 11: Health and Safety Information ......................378
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information
. . . . . . . 385
FCC Part 15 Information to User
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Commercial Mobile Alerting Syste
m (CMAS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Smart Practices While Driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Battery Use and Safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
UL Certified Travel Charger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Display / Touch-Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
GPS & AGPS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Emergency Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Care and Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Responsible Listening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Operating Environment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for
Wireless Devi
ces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device
. . . . . . . . . . 410
6
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Other Important Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Section 12: Warranty Information ....................................413
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
End User License Agreement for Software
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Index ..................................................................................431
7
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to get started with your device by
installing and charging the battery and optional memory card, and
setting up your voice mail.
Before using your device for the first time, you’ll need to install and
charge the battery.
The micro SIM card is loaded wit
h your subscription details,
available optional services, and many other features. If desired, you
can also install an SD card to store media for use with your device.
Understanding this User Manual
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your
phone. A robust index for features begins on
page 431.
Also included is important safety information that you should know
before using your phone.
This manual provides navigation instr
uctions according to the default
display settings. If you select other settings, navigation may be
different.
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual assume
you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys.
Getting Started 8
Note:
Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and
may vary from your device, depending on the software version
on your device, and any changes to the device’s Settings.
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start
with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays
may vary, depending on the software version of your device and
any changes to the device’s Settings.
Special Text
Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the
rest. These are intended to point out important information, share
quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.
The definitions for these methods are as follows:
•
Notes
: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or
sub-menu.
•
Tips
: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
•
Important
: Points out important information about the current feature that
could affect performance.
•
Warning
: Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of
data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.
9
Text Conventions
This manual provides condensed information about how to use your
phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions are
used to represent often-used steps:
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of
selecting successive options in longer, or
repetitive, procedures.
Example:
From the Home screen, press (
Menu
)
Settings
Connections
tab
Bluetooth
.
Removing the Battery Cover
The battery, micro SIM card and SD card are installed under the
battery cover.
Important!
Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure
the device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold
down the
key until the power-off image displays,
then tap
Power off
.
Caution!
Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during
installation or removal. Doing so may damage the cover.
Getting Started 10
To remove the battery cover:
1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch (1).
2. Place your
fingernail in the opening (2) and firmly “pop” the
cover off the device (similar to a soda can).
Release Latch
Installing the microSD Memory Card
Your device supports an optional (external) microSD™ memory
cards for storage of media such as music, pictures, video and other
files. The SD card is designed for use with this mobile device and
other devices.
Note:
This device supports a memory card of up to a 64GB.
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the device.
3. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.
4. Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket until it
clicks into place.
11
Important!
Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the
device’s contact pins.
Note:
MicroSD cards should be formatted within the Storage menu.
Using an older or slow microSD card can affect camera
performance, especially for video recording.
To remove the microSD Memory Card:
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card
should pop partially out of the slot.
3. Remove the card from the slot.
4. Replace the battery cover.
Installing the Battery
Before using your device for the first time, install the battery and
charge it fully.
Getting Started 12
Important!
Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the
device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold down
the key until the Device options pop up displays,
then tap
Power off
.
To install the battery:
1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs on
the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone, making
sure the connectors align.
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
To remove the battery:
Grip the battery at the top end and lift it up and out of the
battery compartment.
Installing Battery
Replacing the Battery Cover
Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and
press down until you hear a click.
13
Caution!
When replacing the battery cover, do not apply pressure to
the screen (“squeeze”) as this can damage the screen.
Charging the Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall
charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with your
device. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your local
Samsung dealer for further details.
Before using your device for the first time, you must fully charge the
battery.
Charging Head
USB Cable
Note:
Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall
charger. If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is
not installed, the handset will power cycle continuously and
prevent proper operation. Failure to unplug the wall charger
before you remove the battery, can cause the device to become
damaged.
Getting Started 14
Important!
It is recommended you fully charge the battery before
using your device for the first time.
1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.
2. Locate the Charger/Accessory jack.
3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory jack.
4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet. The
device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its
charge state and percent of charge.
Warning!
While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not
function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB
power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB
cable from the device.
Note:
If the charger is incorrectly connected, damage to the accessory
port will occur therefore voiding the phone’s warranty.
15
5. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power
plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s
connector from the phone.
Important!
If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that
a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad
of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void
the warranty.
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time
remain (~15% charge), a warning tone sounds and the
“Battery low” message repeats at regular intervals on the display. In
this condition, your device conserves its remaining battery power, by
dimming the backlight.
When the battery level becomes too low, the device automatically
turns off.
The on-screen battery charge is represented (by default) as a
colored battery icon. You can also choose to display a percentage
value. Having a percentage value on-screen can provide a better
idea of the remaining charge on the battery.
Press and then tap
Settings
My device
tab
Display
Show battery percentage
.
For more information, refer to “Display Settings” on page 316.
Getting Started 16
Extending Your Battery Life
Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS
functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of
helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:
•
Reduce the time your backlight stays on.
•
Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.
•
Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.
•
Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this
function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location;
each query drains your battery.
•
Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your
device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can
over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.
•
Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and interface
functions.
•
Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have
been consuming your battery resources.
•
Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.
•
Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background applications
that are still running. These minimized applications can, over time, cause
your device to “slow down”.
•
Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power.
Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or
Gallery image.
17
Switching the Device On or Off
Once the device has been configured, you will not be prompted with
setup screens again.
To turn the device on:
Press and hold (
Power/End
) until the device switches
on.
The device searches for your network and after finding it, you
can make or receive calls.
Note:
The display language is preset to English at the factory. To
change the language, use the Language menu.
For more
information, refer to “Language and Input
Settings” on
page 341.
To turn the device off:
1. Press and hold (
Power/End
) until the Device options
screen appears.
2. Tap
Power off
( )
OK
.
Initial Device Configuration
1. Select a language from the associated field.
English is the default language.
Note:
If you are visually impaired or have difficulty hearing, tap
Accessibility
to configure the accessibility settings.
2. Tap
Next
and follow the on-screen setup instructions.
Getting Started 18
Note:
You may be prompted with a notification that your activation is
completed.
Note:
Enabling Google location services can drain battery power.
For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on
page 356.
Important!
The device name is also used to provide an identification
for your device’s Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Direct names.
3. Tap
Finish
to complete the setup process.
Restarting the Device
1. Press and hold (
Power/End
) until the Device options
screen appears.
2. Tap
Restart
( )
OK
.
Locking and Unlocking the Device
By default, the device screen locks when the backlight turns off.
Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of
the directions shown unlock the device.
Note:
You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent
unauthorized use of your device.
For more information, refer t
o
“Security” on page 365.
19
Voicemail
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as your
battery is charged and the micro SIM card inserted, activate your
voicemail account.
Important!
Always use a password to protect against unauthorized
access.
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voicemail:
Note:
Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then tap
(
Voicemail
) key.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold the
key until the device dials voicemail.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a
display name.
Getting Started 20
Accessing Your Voicemail
You can access your voicemail by either pressing and holding
on the keypad, or by using the device’s Application icon, then
tapping the Voicemail a
pplication.
To access Voice Mail using the menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap and then touch and hold
until the device dials voicemail.
Note:
Touching and holding will launch the voicemail
application.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voicemail
center.
Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk key
on the phone you are using.
3. Enter your passcode.
21
Section 2: Understanding Your Device
This section outlines key features of your device. It also describes
the device’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the device
is in use.
Features of Your Device
Your device is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many significant
features. The following list outlines a few of the features included in
your device.
•
LTE network with a Dual-core processor
•
Delivers data faster using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access Plus
(HSPA+).
•
Android Version 4.2.2
•
Brilliant 4.3-inch qHD sAMOLED display
•
Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone menus and
options including applications and up to seven home screens.
•
Virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard
•
Galaxy Gear™ compliant. For a list of compatible smartphones, please
visit: www.samsung.com/us/galaxygearsupport.
•
Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see
www.samsungsmartswitch.com
•
Wi-Fi
®
Capability
•
WatchON
®
– Rich TV experience with Infrared (IR) remote
•
Apps available to download from the Google Play™ Store
Understanding Your Device 22
•
Samsung Link™ to share your media content across connected devices.
Cloud connectivity is enabled via the use of an external Web storage
service
•
8 megapixel camera and camcorder
•
1.9 megapixel Front Facing camera
•
Share Shot picture sharing functionality
•
S-Beam file transfer technology
•
Share Shot camera sharing-capable via multi-connect Wi-Fi Direct
connection
•
Bluetooth enabled
•
NFC-compatible
•
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube, Google
Maps, Google Voice Search)
•
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging and Google
Hangouts™
•
Corporate and Personal Email
•
Music Player with multitasking features
•
Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Play Books™ and Play
Newstand™.
•
Assisted GPS (Google Navigation)
•
Webkit-based browser
•
Expandable memory slot - supports up to 64GB microSD
•
Video Chat via Google Hangouts
•
Google Play™ Music
23
Front View
The following illustrations show the main elements of your device.
The following list correlates to the illustrations.
1.
Indicator light
illuminates with a series of distinct colors and
flashing patterns to indicate different notifications and
statuses. Events include Charging, Low battery, and Missed
event:
•
Powering on -
blue
blinks/animates
•
Battery Charging -
red
remains on
•
Battery Fully Charged -
green
remains on.
•
Low Battery or Charging Error-
red
blinks/animates
•
Missed Notification (Call or Messaging) -
blue
blinks/animates
For more information, refer to “LED Indicator” on page 319.
2.
Menu key
displays a list of options available for the current
screen. From the Home screen it displays Add apps and
widgets, Create folder, Set wallpaper, Edit page, Search, and
Settings options.
Understanding Your Device 24
6
7
8
9
3
2
10
54
1
5
3.
Home
key displays the Home screen when pressed. Press and
hold to display your recent apps, Task manager, and Remove
all option. Double-press to activate S Voice.
4.
USB Power/Accessory connector
allows you to connect a power
cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data cable.
25
5.
Microphones
are used during phone calls and allow other
callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them.
There are two microphones on the device:
•
Bottom microphone: used during handset mode.
•
Top microphone: used while an active call is in the speakerphone mode
and assists in noise cancellation (2 microphone solution).
6.
Back key
redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.
7.
Display
shows all the information needed to operate your
phone, such as the connection status, received signal strength,
phone battery level, and time.
8.
Front Facing Camera
allows you to take pictures while facing
the screen and allows you to video conference.
9.
Proximity and Light (RGB) Sensors
The proximity sensor detects
how close an object is to the surface of the screen. This is
typically used to detect when your face is pressed up against
the screen, such as during a phone call. The light sensor lets
you use the ambient light level to adjust the screen brightness/
contrast. This sensor decreases screen brightness in dim light.
•
In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device to
increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.
•
In dim light conditions, the device decreases the screen brightness to
compensate.
•
While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and locks the
keypad to prevent accidental key presses.
10.
Receiver
allows you to hear the other caller.
Understanding Your Device 26
2 1
7
6
5
3 4
Back View
The following illustration shows the external elements of your
Device:
1.
micro SIM Card Slot
(internal) Installation location for SIM card.
2.
External speaker
allows you to hear ringers, music, and other
sounds offered by your phone.
3.
microSD Card Slot
(internal) allows you use a microSD card to
expand the memory of your device.
4.
Flash
is used to take photos in low-light conditions.
5.
Headset jack
allows you to connect a hands-free headset so
you can listen to music.
6.
Camera lens
is used to take photos.
7.
IR Transmitter
used to emit infrared signals used for controlling
external devices. For more information, refer to “WatchON” on
page 266.
27
Side Views
The following illustration shows the side elements of your device:
2
1
1.
Volume key
allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby
mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice volume during
a call.
When receiving an incoming call:
•
Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.
2.
Power/End key
switches the phone off and on.
Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the Silent mode
or Airplane mode states, turn the device on or off, or Restart.
Understanding Your Device 28
Device Display
Your display provides information about the device’s status, and is
the interface to manage features. The display indicates your
connection status, signal strength, battery status and time. Icons
display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is
received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was
set. The screen also displays notifications, and Application (or
shortcut) bar with five primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, Internet, and Apps.
Display settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the
wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.
From the Home screen, tap
My device
My device
(
Apps
) (
Settings
)
(
My device
tab)
Display
. For more information, refer
to “Display Settings” on page 316.
29
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,
signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays
notifications about incoming messages, calls and other actions.
This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display screen:
Indicator Icons
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s display and
Indicator area:
Note:
Some Notification icons can be hidden manually by toggling the
status of the Notification panel function.
For more information,
refer to “Accessing Additional Screen Function
s” on page 43.
Displays your current signal strength. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You
cannot send or receive any calls or access online
information.
Indicates there is no signal available.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Understanding Your Device 30
Displays to indicate a security warning. You are
prompted to set
a screen lock password.
Displays when a call is in progress. Icon is
displayed in the Status bar area.
Displays when a call is on hold. Icon is displayed in
the Status bar area.
Displays when an active call is routed through a
Bluetooth headset. Icon is displayed in the Status
bar area.
Displays when you ha
ve missed an incoming call.
Displays when you device is set to automatical
ly
reject all incoming cal
ls. The All numbers option
is enabled from within
Call settings
Call rejection
Auto reject mode
menu.
Displays when the speakerphone is on. Icon is
displayed in the Status bar area.
Displays when the microphone is muted. Icon is
displayed in the Status bar area.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
forward. Displayed in the Status bar when the
current call is minimized.
For more information,
refer to
“Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings”
on page 328.
31
Displays your current battery charge level. Icon
shown is fully charged.
Displays when the current battery is 100 percent
charged. When the battery is 100 percent, an icon
will be shown at the top left of the screen.
Displays your battery is currently charging.
Displays your current battery charge level is
low (Charge: ~28% - 15%).
Displays your current battery charge level is
very low (Charge: ~15% - 5%).
Shows your current battery only has up to 4%
power remaining and will soon shutdown.
(Charge: ~4% - 1%).
Displays when your device is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 3G network. 3G indicator is only seen when
roaming.
Displays when your phone is communicating
with the HSPA+ network.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 4G network.
Displays when the phone has detected an active
USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode.
Understanding Your Device 32
Displays when there is a new text or multimedia
message has been received.
Displays when an outgoing text message has
failed to be delivered.
Displays when there is a new voicemail message.
Displays in the notifications window when there
is a new Email message.
Displays in the notifications window when there
is a new Gmail message.
Displays when a new Google+ notification has
been received.
Displays when Hangout updates are available for
download.
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar
Event has arrived.
For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 196.
Displays when an alarm is set.
For more in
formation, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on
page 203.
Displays when the device is in Silent mode.
All sounds except media and alarms are silenced,
and Silent mode is set to
Vibrate
. For more
information, refer to “Silent mode via Device
Options Screen” on page 320.
33
Displays when the device is in Silent mode.
All sounds are silenced, and Silent mode is set to
Mute
.
Displays when data synchronization and
application sync is active and synchronization is in
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when the Blocking mode feature is
active. For more information, refer to “Blocking
Mode” on page 335.
Displays when the Hands-free Mode is active.
For more information, refer to “Hands-free Mode”
on page 336.
Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and
enabled.
Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active
and communicating with an external device.
Displays when Near Field Communication (NFC)
has been activated.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in
progress.
Displays when a file or application download is in
progress.
Understanding Your Device 34
Displays when the Share shot option is enabled
from within the Camera Shooting mode menu and
images and being shared via Wi-Fi Direct.
Displays when a screen capture has been taken
and stored in the clipboard.
For more
information, refer to “Using Motions and
Gestures” on page 54.
Displays when your device is currently sharing/
streaming media to paired device using the
Samsung Link application.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when a Play Store download has
completed.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an
available open wireless network.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is communicating
with another compatible device.
Displays to alert you to disable an active Wi-Fi
Direct connection if not in use - to conserve
battery power.
35
Displays in the notifications window when there are
too many on-screen notification icons to display.
Tap to show more notifications.
Tap to select a text input method.
Displays in the notifications window when a
song is currently playing within the Music
application.
Displays in the notifications window when a song is
currently playing within the Play Music application.
Displays when your device’s GPS is on and
communicating.
Displays when the external SD card (internal
microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted)
from the phone and is now ready for either removal
or formatting.
Displays when the External SD card is being
prepared for mounting to the device. This is
required for communication with the External SD
card.
Displays when the microSD card has been
improperly or unexpectedly removed.
Displays when storage within either the internal
location or the external SD card has reached its
capacity. It is recommended you either move
files off or delete them to make additional room.
Understanding Your Device 36
Home Screen
The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on
your phone. There are initially seven available panels, each
populated with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize
each of these panels.
Connection Status
Status Bar
Notification
area
Status
area
Shortcuts
Signal strength
Battery status
Time
Widget
Google Search
Home Screen
Primary
Sh
ortcuts
Understanding Your Device 38
•
Notification area
displays those icons associated with end-user
notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),
new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, Emails, and Text/MMS
messages.
–
These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the
Status bar area) and display important user information.
–
This information can be accessed by swiping down from the Status bar
(page 42).
•
Status area
displays those icons associated with the status of the device
such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G/3G, Wi-Fi
communication, battery levels, etc.
•
Home Screen
is a customizable screen that provides information about
notifications and device status, and allows access to application Widgets.
•
Extended Home Screens
extend beyond the current visible screen width
to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other customization
features.
–
There are six available extended screens (panels) each of which may be
populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens share the
use of the five Primary Shortcuts.
–
The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white square. Up to
seven (7) total screens are available.
Note:
Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all
screens.
39
( )
( )
( )
( )
•
Google search
is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by
Google™. Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you can verbally
enter a search term and initiate an online search.
–
Tap (
Voice Actions
) to launch the function from within this
Google widget.
•
Widgets
are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts). These
can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or extended).
•
Shortcuts
are icons that launch available device applications such as
Camera, YouTube, Contacts, Phone, Email, Play Store, etc. These function
the same as shortcuts on your computer.
–
Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,
the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.
–
The Application screens can be accessed by tapping (
Apps
) from
the Primary shortcuts area.
–
Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of
times.
•
Primary Shortcuts
: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the
available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or
launch any of the following functions:
–
Phone
launches the phone-related screen functions (Keypad,
Logs, Favorites, and Contacts).
–
Contacts
launches the Contacts-related screens (Phone,
Groups, Favorites, and Contacts).
–
Messaging
launches the Messaging menu (create new
messages or open an existing message string).
–
Internet
launches the built-in Web browser.
Understanding Your Device 40
–
Apps
launches the Applications page.
•
Tap (
Apps
) to access the Applications screens.
•
While in the Applications screens, tap (
Back
) to easily return to
the Home screen.
As you transition from screen to screen, a screen indicator (located
at the bottom) displays the currently active panel.
Home Key
The
Home
key ( ) takes you back to your Home screen
(indicated by a white Home icon).
Press and hold to launch the Recent apps/Task manager
screen. For more information, refer to “Accessing Recently-
Used Applications” on page 194.
Menu Key
The
Menu
key ( ) activates an available menu function for the
current screen or application.
Back Key
The
Back
key ( ) returns you to the previously active screen. If
the on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the
keyboard.
Home Screen Menu Settings
When on the Home screen, press and then select any of the
following menu options:
•
Add apps and widgets
allows you to quickly access the Widget tab
where you can then drag a selected widget to an available area on a
selected screen.
41
•
Create folder
allows you to create on-screen folders to help organize files
of application shortcuts.
•
Set wallpaper
allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the Home
screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. Choose from Gallery, Live
wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
•
Edit page
allows you to add or remove extended screens from your
device. You can have up to six extended screens (one Home screen and six
Extended screens).
•
Search
displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a
key term online.
•
Settings
provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.
–
The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then
tapping
Settings
.
Notification Bar
The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync
status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can
expand this area to display the Notification screen that provides
more detailed information about the current on-screen notification
icons.
1. Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated application (2).
Understanding Your Device 42
Clearing Notifications
1. In a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the
bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel.
2. Tap
Clear
. The notifications are cleared from the panel.
Accessing Additional Screen Functions
In addition to notifications, this screen also provides quick and ready
access to device functions. These can be quickly activated or
deactivated.
Scrolling across a horizontal list of functions has been enhanced
with an accessible Grid view.
Note:
You can select the function buttons you see at the top of the
Notifications panel.
Only 5 buttons are shown at any one time.
The Grid view is the only way to view all functions.
43
To activate the Grid view:
From the Notification panel, tap (
Open Grid view
) to
display additional functions.
To minimize the Grid view:
From the Notification panel, tap (
Close Grid view
) to show
only your primary functions.
To customize the functions displayed:
1. From the Notification screen, tap (
Open Grid view
) to
display additional functions.
2. Tap
(
Edit
) then locate the Notifications panel area located
at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen.
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function then drag
it to the top row.
Customizing the Screens
You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the Widgets,
Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one screen could
contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media, while
another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail.
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
•
Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens
•
Assigning a New Home screen
•
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
•
Sharing Application Information
•
Managing Shortcuts
•
Adding and Removing Widgets
Understanding Your Device 44
•
Changing the Background (Wallpapers)
Adding and Deleting Screens
Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these screens
and then add them back later.
Note:
These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.
Important!
Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at
least one screen.
To delete a screen:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Edit page
.
2. Touch and hold, then drag the undesired screen up to the
Remove
tab ( ).
3. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
To add a screen:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Edit page
.
2. Tap
(
Add screen
). The newly added screen appears as
the last page.
3. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
45
Rearranging the Screens
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Edit page
.
2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location.
Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right is screen last
screen.
Assigning a New Home Screen
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Edit page
.
2. Tap . The new Home screen then indicates this
(
Home screen
) icon at the top of the selected screen.
Sharing an App
The device’s Applications menu now comes with a feature that
allows you to share information about your selected applications
with external users.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
).
2. Press
and then tap
Share apps
.
3. Place a check mark alongside those applications you wish to
share information about and tap
Done
.
Note:
Shared applications consist of those that have previously been
downloaded from the Play Store.
4. Select a sharing method. Choose from: Bluetooth, ChatON,
Copy to clipboard, Drive, Email, Gmail, Google+, Hangouts,
Messaging, S Memo, and Wi-Fi Direct.
5. The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the new
information.
Understanding Your Device 46
Managing Shortcuts
Note:
To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must
carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the
edge of the screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can
begin to move it to the adjacent screen.If this does not work,
delete it from its current screen. Activate the new screen and
then add the selected shortcut.
To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:
1. From the Home screen, select a screen location for your new
shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you
reach the desired one.
2. Tap
Apps
( ) to reveal all your current available
applications. By default, applications are displayed as an
Alphabetical grid.
3. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application.
4. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then
appears to hover over the current screen.
5. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the current
screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock the shortcut
into its new position.
47
To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:
1. From the Home screen, navigate to a screen with an empty
area.
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
3. From the
Home screen
window, tap
Apps and widgets
Apps
.
4. Scroll across the pages and in a single motion, touch and hold
an application to place a copy on the current screen.
To delete a shortcut:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the desired shortcut.
This unlocks it from its location on the current screen.
2. Drag the shortcut over the
Remove
tab ( ) and release it.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
Note:
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
exception of the
Apps
shortcut.
To remove a primary shortcut:
From the Home screen, touch and hold the primary shortcut
you want to replace, then drag it to an empty space on any
available screen. The primary shortcuts are now updated to
show an empty slot.
To insert a new primary shortcut:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
).
2. Locate your desired application, then touch and hold the on-
screen icon to position it on a desired screen. For more
information, refer to “Managing Shortcuts” on page 47.
Understanding Y
our Device 48
3. Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want to add as
the new primary shortcut.
4. Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the screen.
5. In a single motion, touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag
it into the empty space within the row of primary shortcuts.
The new primary shortcut will now appear on both the Home
and Extended screens.
Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on any
screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.
To add a Widget:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
Widgets
tab.
2. Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired Widget.
3. Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches from the
screen.
4. While still holding the Widget, scroll left or right across the
available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your
current screen.
To remove a Widget:
1. Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current
screen.
2. Drag the widget over the
Remove
tab ( ) and release it.
•
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn red.
•
This action doesn’t delete the Widget, it just removes it from the current
screen.
49
To place a widget onto a different screen:
1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.
2. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent
page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page.
3. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.
4. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.
Managing Wallpapers
Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live
wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default
phone wallpapers).
Note:
Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional
battery power.
To change the current Home screen wallpaper:
1. Navigate to any screen.
– or –
Press
to go to the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
3. From the
Home screen
window tap
Set wallpaper
Home
screen
.
4. Select a Wallpaper type:
•
Tap
Gallery
to select from a user image stored in the camera image
gallery, crop the image, and tap
Done
.
•
Tap
Live wallpapers
to select from a list of animated backgrounds,
once done tap
Set wallpaper
.
Understanding Your Device 50
•
Tap
Photos
to select from a list of available images, once done tap
SET WALLPAPER
.
•
Tap
Wallpapers
, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then
tap
Set wallpaper
.
Note:
Wallpapers supports the following image types: JPEG, PNG, GIF,
BMP, and WBMP.
To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Display
Wallpaper
.
– or –
Touch and hold an empty area of the screen and select
Set wallpaper
.
2. Choose from
Home screen
,
Lock screen
, or
Home and lock
screen
.
Note:
The
Home and lock screens
is an additional option that allows
you to change both screens at the same time.
3. Select a wallpaper type (
Gallery
,
Live wallpaper
, or
Wallpapers
).
4. Choose an image and tap
Done
or
Set wallpaper
.
51
To change the current Lock screen wallpaper:
1. Navigate to any screen, touch and hold an empty area of the
screen, and tap
Set wallpaper
Lock screen
.
– or –
From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Display
Wallpaper
Lock screen
.
2. Select a Wallpaper type:
•
Tap
Gallery
to select from a user image stored in the camera image
gallery, crop the image, and tap
Done
.
•
Tap
Wallpaper
, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then
tap
Set wallpaper
.
Screen Navigation
Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate the
features of your device and enter characters. The following
conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation
action in the procedures.
Navigating Through the Screens
The following terms describe the most common hardware and on-
screen actions.
•
Press and hold
: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons
to select or activate an item. For example: press the Navigation key to
scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys require you to press and
hold them to activate a feature, for example, you press the Lock key to
lock and unlock the device.
Understanding Your Device 52
•
Tap
: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the
virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon to open
the application. A light touch works best.
•
Touch and hold
: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available
options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: touch and hold from
the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.
•
Flick
: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This finger
gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when flicking through
contacts or a message list.
•
Swipe or slide
: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across
the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a
list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll
among the seven panels.
•
Drag
: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to
move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target
position.
•
Rotate
: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to
landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to
landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard, or
when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.
•
Pinch
: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and
forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or
a Web page. (Move fingers inward to zoom out.)
•
Spread
: “Spread” the screen using your thumb
and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move
fingers outward to zoom in.)
53
Note:
These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For
more information, refer to “Customizing the Screens” on
page 44.
•
Motion Navigation and Activation
: The device comes equipped with the
ability to assign specific functions to certain device actions that are
detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope.
Note:
Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active. For more
information, refer to “Motions and Gestures Settings” on
page 350.
Using Motions and Gestures
By activating the various motion and gesture features within this
menu (page 350), you can access a variety of time saving functions.
Caution!
Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results. To learn how to properly control motions,
tap
(
Apps
)
Settings
My device
tab
Motions and
gestures
. When tapped, each entry comes with an on-screen
tutorial.
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Motions and gestures
.
My device
My device
• Motion
: allows you to control your device using natural movements (on
the screen).
• Palm motion
: allows you to control your device by touching the screen
with your entire hand.
Understanding Your Device 54
• Gyroscope calibration
: calibrate your device by using the built-in
gyroscope.
To activate Motion:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Motions and
gestures
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Motion
slider to the right
to turn it on.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap
OK
.
Note:
At least one feature must be activated before Motion can be
activated.
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to the on
position.
For more information, refer to “Motions and Gestures Settings” on
page 350.
To activate Palm Motion:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Motions and
gestures
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Palm motion
slider to the
right to turn it on.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap
OK
.
Note:
At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can
be activated.
55
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to the on
position.
For more information, refer to “Motions and Gestures Settings” on
page 350.
Gyroscope Calibration
Calibrate your device by using the built-in gyroscope.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
My device
My device
(
My device
tab)
Motions and gestures
Gyroscope
calibration
.
2. Place the device on a level surface and tap
Calibrate
. The
device adjusts the level of the accelerometer.
Note:
During the calibration process a green circle appears on-screen
and the center circle adjusts to the center position.
Menu Navigation
You can tailor the device’s range of functions to fit your needs using
both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and features are
accessed by scrolling through the available on-screen menus. Your
device defaults with seven screens.
Navigating Through the Application Menus
There are three default Application Menu screens available. As you
add more applications from the Play Store, more screens are created
to house these new apps.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
). The first Application
Menu screen displays.
•
To close the Applications screen, press
(
Home
)
.
Understanding Your Device 56
2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.
3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated
application.
Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available from within most screen and applications.
1. Press
. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the screen.
2. Tap an available on-screen option.
Using Context Menus
Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that
apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to
menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your
desktop computer.
Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context menu.
Context
Menu
57
Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts
List
This section describes features and functionality associated with
making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to
store contact information.
Displaying Your Phone Number
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
About device
Status
. Your phone
number displays in the
My phone number
field.
Note:
The device’s
Settings
menu can also be activated by pressing
and then tapping (
Apps
) (
Settings
).
Making a Call
You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card
or to the device’s memory. These entries are referred to as the
Contacts list
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Phone
).
2. Enter the phone number and then tap
.
If you make a mistake while dialing, tap to clear the
last digit. Touch and hold
to clear the entire sequence.
Call Functions and Contacts List 58
Note:
When you activate the
Auto redial
option in the
Call settings
Additional settings
menu, the device automatically redials up to
10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already
on the phone, provided your call is not sent to voicemail.
Note:
If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device
(launching Keypad, etc.), you might be accidentally swiping over
the front sensors.
Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Contacts
).
2. Locate a contact from the list.
3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the number
by going to the right. This action places a call to the recipient.
Running a Call in the Background
If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen, you
are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green
phone icon within the Status bar.
This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something
else (multi-task) such as access the Contacts list, view a recent
email, locate a picture, etc..
In Call Notification
59
Briefly tap
key to end the call.
Call
Note:
To redial a recent number, tap at the end of the call or
locate the number from the Logs list, tap the entry and tap
Call
.
Ending a Call
Ending a Call from the Status Bar
1. From an active call, you can launch a separate application or
return to the Home screen. The current call is kept active in the
background.
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel.
3. Tap
End
to end the currently active call.
Making Emergency Calls
If you do not have a SIM card installed when you turn on the phone,
the
Insert SIM card to make calls
message displays and an animated
tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card.
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call with the
phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed
1. Tap
Emergency call
from the on-screen display to make an
emergency call.
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
. Complete your call. During this
type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode,
Keypad, and End Call features.
Call Functions and Contacts List 60
Note:
Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For more
information, refer to “Pow
er Saving Mode” on page 336.
3. Tap to exit this calling mode.
Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number
a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal calling operations,
you should first exit this mode.
1. Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device.
2. From the Home screen, tap
.
3. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap
.
4. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will have
access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features.
Note:
This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a
normal calling mode.
5. At the Emergency Callback screen, follow the on-screen
instructions.
Dialing Options
When you enter numbers on the Keypad, you will see three
on-screen options.
From the keypad screen, use one of the following options:
•
Voicemail
( ) to access your Voicemail service.
•
Call
( ) to call the entered number.
•
Delete
( ) to delete digits from the current number.
61
To view additional dialing options:
After entering a number, tap :
• Send message
to send the current caller a text message while still
maintaining the current call active.
• Add to contacts
to add the current number to either a new or existing
Contacts entry.
• Speed dial setting
to access the Speed dialing setting menu where you
can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.
• Add 3-sec pause
to insert a two-second pause to enter a 3-second
delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing after three
seconds without any additional keys being pressed.
Tip:
You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering
multiple 3 second pauses.
•Add wait
to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone
waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be
manually sent by tapping
Yes
.
• Call settings
to provide you access to the Call settings screen.
Call Functions and Contacts List 62
Answering a Call
When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the
incoming call image. The caller's phone number, picture, or name if
stored in Contacts List, displays.
At the incoming call screen:
•
Touch and slide in any direction to answer the call.
•
Touch and slide in any direction to reject the call.
•
Touch and drag the
Reject call with message
tab upward and tap a
predefined rejection message or tap
Create new message
to create a
new custom outgoing response.
Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the
entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone
number, if available.
Touch and
slide in any
direction to
answer the
call
Touch and drag
upward to reject
with a message
Touch and slide
in any direction
to reject the call
63
Managing Reject Calls
This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown
callers as rejected contacts. These Contacts are then added to your
Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from
within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press
and then tap
Call settings
Call rejection
.
3. Tap the
Auto reject mode
field to configure your automatic
rejection settings. Rejected calls are routed automatically to
your voicemail. Choose from:
•Off
: disables the auto rejection feature.
•All numbers
: enables the features for all known and unknown numbers,
including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list.
• Auto reject numbers
: automatically rejects all entries assigned to the
Reject list/Blacklist.
Adding numbers to the rejection list
Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via
the Auto reject list menu. The Contacts menu option assigns all
numbers for an individual as rejected. The Auto reject list allows to
assign individual numbers.
To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Contacts
).
2. Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview
Screen.
3. Press
and then tap
Add to reject list
. All phone numbers
associated with this entry are then added to the reject list.
Call Functions and Contacts List 64
To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list:
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Call rejection
Auto reject list
.
2. Tap
(
Create
) and either enter the phone number or select
a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list.
3. Tap
Save
to complete the assignment.
International Calls
1.
to delete all dig
its.
From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold
until the device shows “+” on-screen.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area
code, and phone numb
er.
3. If you make a mistake, tap
once to dele
te a single
digit.
– or –
Touch and hold
4. Tap
.
Pause Dialing
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with
automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone numbers.
•
3-Second Pause
automatically sends the next set of numbers after a
three-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a comma (
,
).
1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Press
and then tap
Add 3-sec pause
. This feature adds an
automatic three-second pause.
65
3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be
dialed automatically after the second pause.
Tip:
You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering
multiple 3 second pauses.
.4. Tap
Wait Dialing
Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone
waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next
sequence of numbers.
•
Wait
sends the next set of numbers only after tapping
Yes
. This is
indicated in the number string as a semicolon (
;
).
Note:
Do not add multiple Waits (;) to a number string as this will
continue to prompt you after each sequence.
1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Press
and then tap
Add wait
. This feature causes the
phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set
of entered digits.
3. Tap
4. Once prompted to
Send the following tones?
, tap
Yes
to dial the
remaining digits.
.
Call Functions and Contacts List 66
Redialing the Last Number
The device stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed, received,
or missed if the caller is identified.
To recall any of these numbers:
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap the
(
Logs
tab) to display the list of recent calls.
3. Tap the name/n umber and tap .
Speed Dialing
Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List, you
can set up to 99 speed dial entries (2-100) and then dial them easily
whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric key.
Note:
Speed dial location #1 must be reserved for Voicemail use.
Setting Up Speed Dial Entries
Important!
Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other
number can be assigned to this slot.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Keypad
tab).
2. Press
and then tap
Speed dial setting
. The
Speed dial
setting
screen displays a virtual list of locations with the
numbers 2 through 100.
3. Tap an unassigned number slot. The
Select contact
screen
displays.
67
4. Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial
location. The selected contact number/image is displayed in
the speed dial number box.
Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order
1. From the Home screen, tap
Keypad
tab.
2. Press
and then tap
Speed dial setting
.
Important!
The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another
number cannot be assigned to this slot.
3. Press
and then tap
Change order
.
4. Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed dial
location.
Note:
Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to
switch positions.
5. Tap
Done
. to store the change.
6. Press
to return to the previous screen.
Call Functions and Contacts List
68
Removing a Speed Dial Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
Keypad
tab.
2. Press
and then tap
Speed dial setting
.
3. Touch and hold a existing on-screen speed dial location and
select
Remove
from the context menu.
– or –
Press
and then tap
Remove
. Tap an entry and select
(
Remove
). Select either
Done
(to complete the deletion)
or
Cancel
(to exit).
4. Press
to return to the previous screen.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the
Contacts List for speed dialing.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location
(numbers 2-100, or 1 if you are dialing voice mail) until the
number begins to dial.
3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap
Speed dial setting
and tap a speed dial
number to view the assigned phone number.
69
In Call Options
Your device provides a number of features that are available for use
during a call.
Call duration
Personalized
call sound
Places a
call on hold
Dialer
Noise
Extra volume
Reduction
A
dds a
Ends the
new call
call
Activates or
Deacti
vates
Activates or
Deactivates
speakerphone
Mutes or Unmutes
Bluetooth
the call
Headset
Call Functions and Contacts List 70
Adjusting the Call Volume
During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the device, to
adjust the earpiece volume.
During a call, press the
Up
volume key to increase the volume
level and the
Down
volume key to decrease the level.
– or –
Adjust the audio by enabling selecting an audio preset. Tap the
on-screen
Personalize call sound
button select an equalizer
setting for the incoming call.
•
Enabled/disabled via the Call settings menu (
Call settings
Personalize call sound
). For more information, refer to
“Configuring General Call Settings”
on page 324.
– or –
Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by tapping the
on-screen
Extra volume
button.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using
these keys.
Adjusting Noise Reduction
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise reduction
feature. Activating this feature can improve the quality of your
conversation by reducing ambient noise.
1. Tap
(
Noise reduction off
) to toggle the status and
activate the feature.
2. Tap
(
Noise reduction on
) to toggle the status and
deactivate the feature.
71
Personalizing the Call Sound Setting
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the incoming
call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the current call.
1. Tap
(
Personalize call sound
).
2. Confirm the option is enabled
.
Note:
If prompted to enable the feature via the Call settings menu, go
to
Call settings
Personalize call sound
.
3. Select an available option.
Choose from: Off, Soft sound, Clear sound, Adapt Sound left,
and Adapt Sound right.
Placing a Call on Hold
You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your
network supports this service, you can also make another call while
a call is in progress.
To place a call on hold:
1. Tap
Hold
to place the current call on hold.
2. Tap
Unhold
to activate the call that is on hold.
To make a new call while a call is in progress:
1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up
in Call history.
2. Once connected, tap
Add call
to dial the second call.
3. Dial the new phone number and tap
.
Call Functions and Contacts List 72
Mute Mute
Mute Mute
Headset
To switch between the two calls:
Tap
Swap
.
The previous In call number turns gray and displays
On hold. The new active call displays a green background
behind the number.
Turning the Speakerphone on and off
While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following these
steps:
1. Tap (
Speaker off
) to toggle the speakerphone on.
2. Tap (
Speaker on
) to toggle the speakerphone off.
Speaker
Speaker
Tip:
When the speaker is turned
On
, the color of the speaker is green.
When the speaker is turned
Off
, the color of the speaker is white.
Muting a Call
1. Tap (
Mute off
) to turn mute on so the other caller cannot
hear you speaking.
2. Tap (
Mute on
) to turn mute off and resume your
conversation.
Switching to Bluetooth Headset
1. Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call.
2. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of
speaker by tapping (
Headset off
).
3. At the prompt, tap
OK
to enable Bluetooth if it is not already
activated.
73
4. While on a call, switch back to the device speaker by tapping
(
Headset on
).
Headset
More In-call Options
During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the
Contacts list, or create a Memo.
Viewing the Contacts List
During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.
1. Press
and then tap
Contacts
.
2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.
3. Press
to return to the active call.
Creating a Memo During a Call
During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).
1. Press
and then tap
Memo
.
2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap
Save
.
Creating a Message During a Call
During a call you can create a message.
1. Press
and then tap
Message
(
Tap to compose
message
).
2. Address and create the message.
3. Review your message and tap
(
Send
).
Call Functions and Contacts List 74
Multi-Party calls
Making a Multi-Party Call
A multi-party call is a network service that multiple people to
participate in a multi-party or conference call.
For further details about subscribing to this service, contact
customer service.
Setting up a Multi-Party Call
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap
.
3. Once connected, tap
Add call
, enter the second phone number
and tap
. The first caller is placed on hold.
4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap
Merge
. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party call and
display in the order in which they were called.
Important!
Multiple callers can be joined to a single multi-party line.
Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session
and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty
call. You can swap or place each multi-party call on hold.
75
Having a Private Conversation With One Participant
When you have two participants in a multi-party session, it might be
necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private
conversation can be held with a single caller. While you are in a
multi-party call:
1. Press
and then tap
Manage conference call
.
2. Tap
(
Split Caller
) adjacent to the participants you would
like to split from the current multi-line call. The list displays the
callers in the order they were dialed.
3. Tap the participant to which you want to speak privately.
You can now talk privately to that person while the other
participants can continue to converse with each other. If there
is only one other participant, that person is placed on hold.
4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the
Merge
icon. All of the
multi-party call participants can now hear each other.
Dropping One Participant
1. Press and then tap
Manage conference call
End
to the
right of the number to drop.
The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call
with the other participant.
2. Tap
to end your conversation with the remaining caller.
Call Functions and Contacts List 76
Call Waiting
You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress, if
this service is supported by the network and you have previously set
the Call waiting option to
Activate
.
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone.
For more
information, refer to “Configuri
ng Additional Voice Call Settings” on
page 328.
To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:
1. In a single motion, touch and slide it in any direction
to answer the new incoming call.
2. Tap an option from the Accept call after menu:
• Putting xxx on hold
to place the previous caller on hold while you
answer the new incoming call.
• Ending call with xxx
to end the previous call and answer the new call.
Note:
The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller
is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.
3. Tap
Swap
to switch between the two calls. This places the new
caller on hold and activates the previous call.
Important!
The currently active call is displayed with a green
background.
4. Tap
Swap
again to switch back.
77
Logs Tab
The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts entries) for
calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Logs tab makes redialing
a number fast and easy. It is continually updated as your device
automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and
removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list.
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper left) displays phone
notifications, status, or alerts such as:
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when a call was missed.
Accessing the Logs Tab
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Logs
tab).
2. Tap an entry to view available options.
Note:
The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is
turned on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be
included in your calling history.
Call Functions and Contacts List 78
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and
Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).
Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.
Indicates an
y received calls that were answered.
Indicates a missed call.
Indicates any received calls that were rejected.
Indicates auto rejected calls.
Accessing Call log from The Notifications Area
1. Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar.
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel.
3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen.
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also
choose to access two types of history ent
ry lists depending on how
they are touched.
79
Call logs - Caller Overview
•
Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the
Call options
screen:
• Create contact
to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts.
•View contact
to view the Contact details for the current entry.
•Update existing
to update an existing Contacts entry with the current
number.
•Call
allows you to redial the entry by name or number.
•Send message
allows you to create a new text message to the selected
entry.
•Time
provides the time and date of the call and its duration.
•
Press (
Menu
) to reveal additional options:
–
Copy to dialing screen
to pass the current number to your dialer and
then edit the selected number before you place your next outbound call.
–
Delete
to delete the Contacts entry.
–
Send number
to send the current Contacts entry information to an
external recipient.
–
Add to reject list
to add the current phone number to an automatic
rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be blocked from
making an incoming calls to your phone.
•
Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific contact menu:
• Copy to dialing screen
to make alterations to the current phone
number prior to redial.
• Add to contacts
to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts.
•View contact
to view the information for the currently stored Contacts
entry.
Call Functions and Contacts List 80
• Send number
to send the current Contacts entry information to an
external recipient.
• Add to reject list
to add the current phone number to an automatic
rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be blocked
from making an incoming calls to your phone.
• Delete
to delete the entry from the Logs list.
Altering Numbers from the Logs List
If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to
alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate prefix
by prepending the number.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Logs
tab.
2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific context
menu.
3. Tap
Copy to dialing screen
.
4. Edit the number using the on-screen keypad or delete digits by
pressing
to erase the numbers.
5. Tap
once the number has been changed.
Erasing the Call logs List
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries
from the Logs list.
To clear a single entry from the list:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Logs
tab.
2. Touch and hold an entry and select
Delete
Delete
.
81
To clear all entries from the list:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Logs
tab.
2. Press
and then tap
Delete.
3. Tap
Select all
.
4. Tap
Delete
Delete
to continue with the erasure.
– or –
Tap
Cancel
to stop the current process.
Call Duration
1. From the Home screen, tap
Logs
tab.
2. Press
and then tap
Call duration
.
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
•Last call
: shows the length of time for the last call.
• Dialed calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
• Received calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls received.
• All calls
: shows the total length of time for all calls made and received.
You may reset these times to zero by pressing then
tapping
Reset
.
Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen
When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen
is locked, the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock
screen immediately after a call is missed.
1. Press
(
Power/End
) to reactivate the screen.
2. Touch and drag the button (with the number of missed calls on
it) anywhere on the screen. The Logs tab is then displayed.
Call Functions and Contacts List 82
Section 4: Entering Text
This section describes how to select the desired text input method
when entering characters into your device. This section also
describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount
of key strokes associated with entering text.
Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.
Your device also provides several on-screen keypad text entry
options to make the task of text entry that much easier.
Text Input Methods
There are three text input methods available:
•
Google voice typing
: provides a voice to text interface.
•
Samsung keyboard
(default): an on-screen QWERTY keyboard that
can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.
•
Swype
: is enabled so as you can enter text as you swipe across the
on-screen keyboard. Instead of tapping each key, use your finger
to trace over each letter of a word.
The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and
landscape mode.
83
Selecting the Text Input Method
The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two
locations:
Settings Menu:
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
My device
My device
(
My device
tab)
Language and input
Default
and
select an input method.
Text Input field:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen to open the Notifications screen.
2. Tap (
Select input method
) and select an available input
method.
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting your
finger between words. Swype uses error correcting algorithms and a
language model to predict the next word. Swype also includes a
touch predictive text system.
The on-screen keyboard options are different between the Android
keyboard and Swype on-screen input methods.
Note:
During its initial use, you may be prompted by a series of Swype
Connect set up screens. Follow the initial on-screen set up
instructions.
Entering Text 84
Enabling and Configuring Swype
If you configure another text input method (Samsung keyboard) you
must re-enable Swype before using the Swype keyboard.
For more detailed information on configuring Swype settings, see
“Swype Settings” on page 344.
When Swype is enabled there can also be normal keyboard
functionality.
1. From t
he main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
.
2. Tap
Default
Swype
.
Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or
tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype text
entry tips.
•
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as
pp
in
apple).
•
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
•
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.
•
Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled
word, then touch the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold the
delete key to erase an entire word.
85
Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the
following text mode options:
•ABC
ABC
to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the
on-screen keyboard.
+!=
•SYM
(Symbol) to enter numbers and symbols from the on-screen
keyboard.
Note:
After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes
to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
Swype Keyboard Overview
•Recipients
: a field where you can enter the recipients of the current
message. You can choose from
Groups
,
Favorites
,
Contacts
, or
Logs
.
• Text Input field
: a field where text, number, or other characters can be
entered.
• CAPS/ALT key
: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM
mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.
• SWYPE settings
: Touch and hold this button to access the Swype
settings screen.
• Text Input mode
: There are two available modes:
123ABC
and
SYM.
–
123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common
punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates
SYM
.
Entering Text 86
–
SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button
indicates
123ABC
.
Text input field
CAPS/ALT
Delete
Current
SWYPE Settings
key
Recipients
Mode
Suggestions
Text Input mode
Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE
In
123ABC
mode, you can enter only letters and a few common
punctuation marks from the on-screen keyboard. The text mode key
shows .
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
+!=
87
2. Tap
ABC
to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode
(showing letters and numbers on the on-screen keys). Once in
this mode, the text input type shows
+!=
.
Note:
After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes
to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a word.
–
If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch and
hold
to erase an entire word.
4. Tap (
Send
) to deliver the message.
All lowercase
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase. Pressing this while in 123SYM mode,
reveals additional numeric-symbols keys.
Initial Uppercase
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent
characters are lowercase.
All Uppercase
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following
letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you lift your finger,
the cursor automatically adds a space after the word.
Entering Text 88
Note:
If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an
on-screen popup appears to provide additional word choices.
Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE
By using the on-screen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols are
not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys).
In SYM mode using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers
from the on-screen keyboard.
Once in SYM m
ode, the text mode key shows
.
ABC
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. Tap to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once in
this mode, the text input type shows
ABC
+!=
.
3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want to
enter.
4. Tap
2
1
to select from additional symbols.
For example:
•
To enter
™
: tap
+!=
2
1
and select the
™
key.
89
Using the Samsung Keyboard
This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a Portrait
or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two
orientations are the sizes of the keys.
From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen QWERTY
keyboard displays.
The Samsung Keyboard
This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or
keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/ keyboard,
you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other characters.
To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the settings
to default to the Samsung keyboard.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
My device
My device
(
My device
tab)
Language and input
Default
Samsung keyboard
.
– or –
From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen, then select
(
Select input method
)
Samsung
keyboard
.
2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung
keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input.
Entering Text 90
Shift key
Text input field
Input Mode Current Mode Send Delete
Indicator
Input Options
/Settings
For more detailed information on configuring Samsung Keyboard
settings, see “Samsung Keyboard Settings” on page 341
.
Entering Text using Different Input Options
Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard
is to use the on-screen keys you have other options.
Note:
To access settings, touch and hold the
Input Methods
button
, then tap
(
Settings
) then select it from the available
options.
1. From within an active message, tap the text input field to
reveal the on-screen keyboard.
91
2. Tap (
Input Methods
) to use the default Voice typing input
method to convert your spoken words to on-screen text.
– or –
Touch and hold
to select from other input methods such
as:
• Voice to text
to access Google voice to text service.
• Clipboard
to launch the device’s clipboard area from where you can
select a current clipboard item to place in your current message.
• Settings
to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu.
Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method, select one
of the following text mode options:
• Abc
ABC
ABC
: to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen
keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays
Sym
Sym
123
Sym
Sym
123
.
• Symbol/Numeric
: to enter numbers by pressing the numbers
selecting them on the on-screen keyboard. In this mode, the text mode
button displays .
There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symb
ols available by
tapping .
ABC
ABC
1/3
1/3
Note:
After typing an initial uppercase character, tap to toggle
capitalization.
Entering Text 92
All lowercase
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase.
Initial Uppercase
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent
characters are lowercase.
All Uppercase
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the
cursor automatically advances to the next space.
93
Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. Tap
ABC
ABC
to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once in
this mode, the text input type shows
.
Sym
Sym
123
Note:
After typing an initial uppercase character, the key changes
to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.
–
If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch and
hold to erase an entire word.
4. Tap (
Send
) to deliver the message.
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key displays
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.
2. Tap
Sym
Sym
123
to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode. Once
in this mode, the text input type shows
ABC
ABC
.
3. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.
4. Tap
ABC
ABC
to return to ABC mode.
.
ABC
ABC
Entering Text 94
To enter symbols:
1. Tap
Sym
Sym
123
to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.
2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.
– or –
Tap
1/3
1/3
button to cycle through additional pages.
•
The first number on this key indicates which page (1 or 2) of additional
characters is active.
Using the Google Voice Typing
This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken
words into on-screen text.
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing
feature.
1. From the keyboard, touch the top of the screen and drag it
down to display your notification panel.
2. Tap
(
Select input method
)
Google voice typing
.
3. At the Listening prompt
(
Speak now
), speak clearly and
distinctly into the microphone.
The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking.
For more detailed information on configuring Google Voice
Typing settings, see “Configure Google Voice Typing” on
page 347.
4. Tap
(
Done
) when you are finished.
– or –
Tap
(
Resume
) to resume recognition.
95
Note:
The feature works best when you break your message down
into smaller segments.
Using Google Voice Typing
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen, then select (
Select input method
)
Google voice
typing
. The virtual keyboard is then removed and all
subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to
speech.
2. Speak into the device’s microphone and watch your text being
entered on-screen.
3. If the text is incorrect, tap
DELETE
.
Entering Text 96
Section 5: Contacts
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List. You
can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.
Accounts
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to
synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you want
the applications to synchronize automatically. After determining how
you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate which account to
synchronize with your Contacts list.
1. Sign in to your Google account.
2. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
Accounts
tab) and then navigate to the
My accounts
area.
– or –
From the main
Settings
page, tap
Accounts
tab and then
navigate to the
My accounts
area.
Note:
The Accounts area lists those accounts that have been added to
the device and provides an
Add account
button to quickly and
easily add new ones.
97
Contacts List
Creating a Contact
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your device’s built-in memory.
If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been
synchronized to your phone, these will be made available to your
device during the creation of new entries. These new Contacts
entries can be assigned or saved to
synced accounts such as Device,
SIM, Google, or Corporate.
Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically.
You can create either a
Device
,
SIM
,
Samsung account
,
Google
, or
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
contact.
Important!
The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
types are only visible after creating an email account of
those types on your phone.
•
Device
contacts are stored locally on the device.
Note:
If the device is ever reset to its factory default parameters,
contacts stored on the phone can be lost.
•
SIM
contacts are stored within the micro SIM Card.
Note:
SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an
entry.
Contacts 98
•
Samsung account
contacts are shared with your existing Samsung
account.
•
Google
contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can
also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail
account.
•
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
(also known as Work or Outlook)
contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an
Exchange Server or from within Microsoft
®
Outlook
®
.
•
Add new account
lets you create a new account type. Choose from
Samsung account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
Note:
When storing an entry into your micro SIM card, note that only
the Name, and Number are saved. To save additional
information for a particular contact, such as notes, email, dates,
etc., it is important to save that Contact into your phone’s
onboard memory.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Contacts
).
2. Tap to create a contact.
Note:
You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the
keypad and pressing and then tap
Add to contacts
Create contact
. Continue with step 3.
3. Tap a destination type (
Device
,
SIM
,
Samsung account
,
Google
,
or
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
) (depending on where you
want to save the new contact information).
99
4. Tap the
Name
field and enter a name for this contact using the
displayed keypad.
•
Tap to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First
name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.
5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.
Selections are:
Image
,
Pictures by people
,
Take picture
, or
S Memo
.
Note:
The label entries below can change and are dependant on the
selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not
appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type).
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the
Phone
field) and scroll
through the list to select a category such as
Mobile
,
Home
,
Work
,
Work Fax
,
Home Fax
,
Pager
,
Other
,
Callback
, or
Custom
.
7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.
•
Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered
phone number.
•
Tap to enter an additional phone number
•
Tap to remove a previously entered phone number.
8. Enter additional information such as:
Email, Groups
,
Ringtone
,
Message alert
,
Vibration pattern
or tap
Add another field
to input
additional category information.
•Add another field
contains the following options: Phonetic name,
Organization, IM, Address, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call,
Events, or Relationship.
Contacts 100
•
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and
categories.
9. Tap
Save
to complete and store the new entry.
– or –
Tap
Cancel
to delete the current entry.
To save a Number from your Keypad:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Phone
).
2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.
3. Tap
Add to contacts
Create contact
or select the Contact
entry from the on-screen list.
– or –
Press
and then tap
Add to contacts
Create contact
or
select the Contact entry from the on-screen list.
•
If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and
proceed to step 5.
4. Tap a destination type (
Device
,
SIM
,
Samsung account
,
Google
,
or
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
) (depending on where you
want to save the new contact information).
5. Tap the
Name
and enter a name for this contact using the
displayed keypad.
•
Tap to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First
name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.
6. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.
Selections are:
Image
,
Pictures by people
,
Take picture
, or
S Memo
.
101
Note:
The label entries below can change and are dependant on the
selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not
appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type).
7. Tap the label button (to the left of the
Phone
field) and scroll
through the list to select a category such as
Mobile
,
Home
,
Work
,
Work Fax
,
Home Fax
,
Pager
,
Other
,
Callback
, or
Custom
.
8. Enter additional fields as desired.
9. Tap
Save
to complete and store the new entry.
– or –
Tap
Cancel
to delete the current entry.
Note:
For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text
Input Methods” on page 83.
Finding a Contact
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto
either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an external
location (such as Google or Exchange). They are all physically
separate but are used as a single entity, called Contacts.
Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the
maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may differ.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Contacts
).
Contacts
102
2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.
– or –
Tap the
Search
field and begin entering the entry’s name.
Matching entries are then displayed. This process filters
through all of your current account Contact entries to only
show you the matching entries.
– or –
In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on the
right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through the
list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list. Tap
the contact entry.
Tabs
Search
Contacts
field
Contacts
Create
Contacts
Tabbed
Navigation
103
Editing Contact Information
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap a contact name from the list and tap
(
Edit
).
– or –
Select a contact name and press
and then tap
Edit
.
3. Edit the contact information then:
•
Tap
Save
to complete and store the new entry or
•
Tap
Cancel
to delete the current entry.
Adding a Number to an Existing Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap a contact name from the
list and tap
(
Edit
).
3. Tap a phone number field and
enter a phone number.
•
Tap on the QWERTY
keyboard to remove a previously
entered phone number.
•
Tap to enter an additional
phone number
•
Tap to remove a previously
entered phone number.
Contact Details Screen
Contacts 104
4. Enter additional information such as:
Email, Groups
,
Ringtone
,
Message alert
,
Vibration pattern
or tap
Add another field
to input
additional category information.
•Add another field
contains the following options: Phonetic name,
Organization, IM, Address, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call,
Events, or Relationship.
•
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and
categories.
5. Tap
Save
to complete and store the new entry.
– or –
Tap
Cancel
to delete the current entry.
Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a new phone number.
2. Press
and then tap
Add 3-sec pause
. This feature adds an
automatic three-second pause.
– or –
Press
and then tap
Add wait
. This feature causes the
phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set
of entered digits.
3. Tap
Add to contacts
Update existing
.
4. Scroll through the available list of existing entries and select
the desired target.
105
Note:
This new phone number is then added as a new number to the
selected entry.
5. Tap the label button (to the left of the new phone number) and
scroll through the list to select a category type.
6. Tap
Save
to store and update the entry.
Deleting Contacts
Important!
Once Contacts list entries are deleted, they cannot be
recovered.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete
OK
.
Contact List Options
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Press
. The following options display:
•Delete
: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• SIM Management
: allows you to either copy contacts to/from SIM or
Delete contacts from the SIM.
•Import/Export
: imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage
location.
• Share namecard via
: allows you to send namecards via methods such
as Bluetooth, ChatON, Drive, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Contacts 106
• Merge accounts
: allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries
with either your active Google or Samsung account. If several of your
contacts are from other external sources, this allows you to “back them
up” or copy them to your Samsung account. Tap
OK
to continue or
Cancel
to exit.
• Accounts
: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on Samsung
account, ChatON, Google, LDAP, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or
Server. This option also allows you to manually synchronize all of your
current contacts with their respective accounts. For more information,
refer to
“Synchronizing Contacts”
on page 116.
• Speed dial setting
: allows you to set up speed-dialing.
• Send message/email
: allows you to send a text /picture message or
an email using your Google account.
• Contacts to display
: allows you to choose to display All contacts, those
on your Device, SIM card, Samsung account, Gmail, or only display
contacts that are part of a Customized list.
• Settings
: allows you to configure where you save new contacts to, or
view your service numbers, or send contact information.
Options include: Only contacts with phones, List by, Display contacts by,
Service numbers, and Contact sharing settings.
Contact Menu Options
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu. The
following options display:
•Edit
: allows you to edit the selected entry.
• Delete
: allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry.
107
• Link contact
: allows you to link the current contact to another current
contact. Similar to a “see also” feature. If you can’t remember a
contact’s information, linking entries can help you find the person you
are looking for.
• Share contact via message
: allows you select specific elements of an
existing contact (name, Mobile number, email, etc..) and send them to a
recipient via a text message. This option does not send the entire
Contact entry but only selected elements.
•Add to favorites
: allows you to assign the currently selected contact as
a favorite entry.
• Remove from favorites
: allows you to remove the favorite status from a
previoulsy assigned entry.
• Add to group
: allows you to assign the currently selected contact to a
group entry.
• Add to reject list
: allows you to assign the contact entry to your current
rejection list.
• Share namecard via
: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s
information to an external recipient via either
Bluetooth
,
ChatON
,
Drive
,
Email
(Exchange or Internet),
Gmail
,
Messaging
, or
Wi-Fi Direct
.
• Add shortcut to home
: adds a shortcut to the current Contacts entry to
an available screen location.
Contacts 108
Contact Entry Options
1. From the Home screen,
tap
.
2. Tap an entry to reveal the
Contact entry’s Overview Screen
.
This screen contains Name,
contact numbers, email, and
linked contact information.
3. Press
to reveal the context
menu specific to this entry.
4. Tap an available option.
Contact Overview Screen
109
Linking Contact Information
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts. When you
synchronize your phone with those accounts, each account creates a
separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account that
you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account under her
maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat account, when
you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of
her entries and view the information in one record.
Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You can
select any account email address or information all from one screen,
versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate the desired
account information.
Next time you synchronize your device with your accounts, any
updates contacts make to email account names, email addresses,
etc. automa
tically update in your contacts list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another
entry) to reveal the
Contact entry’s Overview Screen
.
Note:
Typically this is the same contact with a different name or
account information.
Contacts 110
3. Press and then tap
Link contact
.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link). The
second contact is now linked with the first and the account
information is merged into one screen.
Note:
The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays
in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.
Important!
It is the first contact image that is displayed for both, and
the first contact’s name that is used.
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie
(second entry). Julie seems to disappear and only Amy
remains. Tap the Amy entry (showing the Amy image) to
view both.
5. Tap the main linked contact to view the contact information
you linked. The contacts and information displays with an icon
next to the contact name to indicate what type of account
information is contained in the entry.
Unlinking a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you want to
unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.
Note:
Typically this is the same contact with a different name or
account information.
111
3. Tap the link icon
within the
Connection
area.
– or –
Press
and then tap
Separate contact
.
4. Tap
next to the entry you want to unjoin and select
OK
.
The contacts are “unlinked” or separated and no longer
display in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go
back to being separately displayed.
Marking a Contact as Default
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other
messaging type applications, the application needs to know which
information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For example,
when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three phone records for
John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the “default” number or
entry.
The
Mark as default
option marks one entry in a contact record to
use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple
entries for the same person.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a Contact entry.
3. Press
and then tap
Mark as default
. The Mark as default
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name, phone
number, or other contact information.
4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to
be the primary information (such as name, phone number, or
email) and select
Done
.
Contacts 112
Note:
If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry,
assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number
when the contact is selected for dialing.
Sending a Namecard
A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to
recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using
Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap a Contact entry.
3. Press and then tap
Share namecard via
and select a
delivery method:
Bluetooth
,
ChatON
,
Drive
,
Email
(Exchange or
Internet),
Gmail
,
Messaging
, or
Wi-Fi Direct
.
The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is
delivered when you send the message.
Note:
Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange
email account has been created.
Sending All Current Namecards
Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send all
of your current entries at once.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press
and then tap
Share namecard via
.
3. Tap
Select all
to place a check mark alongside all currently
displayed Contact entries.
113
4. Tap
Done
and select a delivery method:
•Bluetooth
to transmit the contacts to another Bluetooth-compatible
device.
•ChatON
to send the contacts to selected buddies.
•Drive
to send the contacts to a designated Google Drive location.
•Email
to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email (Exchange or
Internet).
•Gmail
to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet-based
email.
• Messaging
to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message.
• Wi-Fi Direct
to transmit the entries to another Wi-Fi Direct enabled
device.
Sending a namecard using Bluetooth
You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a
recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on
page 98.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
3. Tap
Share namecard via
Bluetooth
.
Important!
You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.
4. Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card.
Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.
Contacts 114
Copying Contact Information
Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This procedure allows
you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s memory, onto the SIM
card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. From the Contacts List, press
and then tap
SIM Management
Copy contacts to SIM
.
3. Tap
Select all
to choose all current phone contact entries.
– or –
Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark
indicates a selection.
4. Tap
Done
. The name and phone number for the selected
contact is then copied to the SIM.
Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the
phone’s memory, onto the SD card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. From the Contacts List, press
and then tap
Import/Export
Export to SD card
.
3. Tap
OK
to choose all current phone contact entries.
115
Synchronizing Contacts
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and
manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote
accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an
active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact
entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email
addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your device.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
Accounts
tab) and then navigate to the
My accounts
area.
2. Select the email account containing the contacts you wish to
synchronize.
3. Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4. To synchronize only Contacts, toggle the active state of the
Sync Contacts
field. A green check mark indicates the feature
is enabled.
Note:
The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several
minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated,
repeat step 2-3.
5. Your
Contacts
tab then reflects any updated Contact
information.
Contacts 116
Note:
Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and
Corporate accounts via the device.
Display Options
The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which
contacts to display. You can also choose to display only contacts that
have phone numbers.
Note:
Once a display filter has been selected, only those Contact
entries are shown until the
All contacts
option is re-selected.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press
and then tap
Contacts to display
. Select any of the
following to filter according to the selection:
•All contacts
allows you to display all available Contacts.
• Device
lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone.
•SIM
lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card.
• Samsung account
lists those Contacts currently found and sync’d
within the Samsung account.
• Google
lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account.
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
lists those Contacts currently found
within the Exchange account.
•Customized list
allows you to enable which account categories are
displayed. For example, on Google contacts, you can filter which Contact
categories are shown (Friends, Family, etc..)
117
Adding more Contacts via Accounts and
Sync
When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,
MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Accounts
and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account
type with your Contacts list.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
Accounts
tab) and then navigate to the
My accounts
area.
2. Tap
Add account
.
3. Determine which type of account information you want to
synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:
Samsung
account, ChatON, Email, Google, LDAP, Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync, Server,
or
Sync apps with Facebook.
4. Tap an account type to add.
5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type synchronizes
with your Contacts list.
6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact
information. For more information, refer to “Linking Contact
Information” on page 110.
Contacts 118
To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as
pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list. All
of their current contact information is then migrated over to your
phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different
name, separate entries are created and can later be linked (joined)
together into a single entry.
Important!
This process not only synchronizes your contact
information but also your status, events, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Play Store
).
2. Search for and select the
Facebook
app.
3. When you are prompted to download the Facebook application
from the Play Store.
•
Tap
INSTALL
ACCEPT
to complete the process.
•
Tap
OPEN
to launch the application.
4. Log into your Facebook account:
•
Enter your account’s access
Email
and
Password
information and tap
Log in
.
5. If prompted, configure any requested optional permissions and
tap
Log in
.
6. If prompted, select a Contacts Sync option. Choose from: Sync
all, Sync with existing contacts, or Don’t sync.
7. Tap
Done
to complete the login and sync process.
119
To resync Social Network Contacts:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
Accounts
tab and then navigate to the
Accounts
area.
2. Tap
Facebook
and toggle the checkmark alongside the desired
fields.
3. Choose the parameters to sync (ex: Sync Calendar, Sync
Contacts, or Sync Gallery) and tap
Sync now
.
Note:
From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap
Sync
all
to resync all accounts.
Additional Contact Options
Sending an Email to a Contact
Note:
Contacts must contain and email account and address before
you can use the Send email feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press
and then tap
Send message/email
Send email
.
Contacts that contain an email address display.
3. Tap the contact(s) to which you want to send an email. A check
mark displays next to the selection.
Note:
The select contact must have an email as part of their details
screen.
4. Tap
Done
.
5. Select an email account type.
Contacts 120
6. Compose the email and tap
Send
.
Export/Import
For more information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on
page 115.
Contact List Settings
From this menu you can determine the default storage location for
Contacts, display your phone’s primary number, and view service
numbers listed in your Contact list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press
and then tap
Settings
. Configure any of the
following options:
• Only contacts with phones
allows you to display only those contacts
containing phone numbers.
•List by
defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted:
First name
or
Last name
.
• Display contacts by
defines how the current list of Contacts are listed:
First name first
(ex: Steve Smith) or
Last name first
(Smith, Steve).
• Service numbers
lists the currently available service numbers.
• Contact sharing settings
allows you configure how your Contacts
entries are sent: individually or as a single file containing all available
entries.
Tap
Settings
to select a share setting.
–
Send all namecards
allows you to set your Contact sharing option to all
so that your entire Contacts entries are sent as a group and not as
multiple single files. If all your entries are selected only a single file is sent.
121
Note:
Your destination device must support this feature or no entries
will be received by the external device.
–
Send individual namecards
allows you to set your default to send
individual contacts one at a time. Even if you select all your entries, each is
sent individually.
Groups
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call
group. This group can be one of the already present groups (Family,
Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.
Creating a New Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Groups
tab).
2. Press
and then tap
Create
.
3. Tap the
Group name
field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter a new group name.
For more information
, refer to “Text
Input Methods” on page 83.
4. Tap
Group ringtone
and select a ringtone for the group.
Selections are:
Default ringtone, Ringtones
(select from
available ringtones) or
Add
(to navigate your device and select
an existing audio file).
5. Tap
Message alert
and select a message alert ringtone to be
associated with this group.
6. Tap
Vibration pattern
and select a unique vibration pattern
either from an available list or Create your own. This pattern is
then associated with this group.
7. Tap
Add member
to add Contacts to the new group.
Contacts 122
8. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want
to add. A check mark displays next to contact entry. Then tap
Done
.
– or –
Tap
Select all
to place a check mark alongside all current
entries. Then tap
Done
.
9. Tap
Save
to store the newly created group.
Note:
Some externally maintained group types (such as Google) can
only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device.
These external types will not allow editing or deleting members
locally via the phone.
Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a group entry
(
Add group member
).
3. From the available list of
contact
s, tap the contact(s) you want
to add. A check mark display
s
next to contact entry.
4. Tap
Done
. The selected contacts are added to the group.
Removing an Entry From a Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, ta
p
.
2. Tap a group ent
ry.
3. Press
and then tap
Remove member
.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group. A
check mark displays next to contact entry.
5. Tap
Done
.The contacts are removed from the group.
123
Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part of
the selected group.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Touch and hold a group entry then select
Edit group
.
3. Make modifications to the
Group name
,
Group ringtone
,
Message alert
,
Vibration pattern
fields, or
Add member
.
4. Tap
Save
.
Deleting a Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Press
and then tap
Delete groups
.
3. Select either
Select all
or tap the desired group.
4. Tap
Delete
.
5. Select either the
Group only
or
Group and group members
.
6. Tap
OK
.
Sending a Message to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Tap an existing group, and press
and then tap
Send
message
.
– or –
Touch and hold a group entry and select
Send message
.
3. Select the recipients of the new message (indicated by a green
check mark). If an entry contains multiple phone numbers,
each must be selected individually.
4. Tap
Done
.
Contacts 124
5. Type your message, and tap (
Send
).
The Favorites Tab
The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been
designated as favorite contacts.
For more information
, refer to “Logs
Tab” on page 78.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap
(
Favorites
tab).
Adding a contact to your favorites list:
1. From within the Favorites tab, press and select
Add to
favorites
.
2. Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries
you wish to assign as favorites.
3. Tap
Done
to complete the process.
125
Section 6: Messaging
This section describes how to send or receive different types of
messages. It also explains the features and functionality associated
with messaging.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
•
Text Messages
•
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
•
Email and Gmail Messages
•
Hangouts
•
Messenger
•
ChatON
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To
use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s message service.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and receive
multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio messages)
to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To use this
feature, you may need to subscribe to your service provider’s
mult
imedia message service.
Important!
During the creation of a text message, adding an image,
sound file, or video clip automatically changes it from a
text message (SMS) to a multimedia message (MMS).
Messaging 126
Message Icons on the Status Bar
Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the
display when new messages are received.
For more information,
refer to “Status Bar” on page 30.
Note:
The Messaging application can also be accessed by pressing
and then tapping (
Apps
) (
Messaging
).
Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Messaging
) (
Tap to
compose message
).
2. Tap the
Enter recipient
field to manually enter a recipient.
– or –
Tap
to select from one of the following:
•Groups
: to select a recipient from the Group list.
•Favorites
: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.
•Contacts
: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries must
have a wireless phone number or email address).
•Logs
: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages.
3. If adding a recipient from either Logs, Contacts, or Group, tap
the contact to place a check mark then tap
Done
. The contact
displays in the recipient field.
Note:
Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their
name/number in the recipient area and selecting
Delete
.
127
4. Add more recipients by tapping either the
Enter recipient
field
or
and selecting recipients.
5. Tap the
Enter message
field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter a message. For more information, refer to “Text Input
Methods” on page 83.
6. Review your message and tap
(
Send
).
7. If you have more than one recipient, the same text message is
sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field.
Note:
If you exit a message before you send it, it will be automatically
saved as a draft.
Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Contacts
).
2. Locate an entry from the Contacts list.
3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the number
by going to the left. This action addresses a new text message
to the selected recipient.
Message Options
Options before composing a message
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Messaging
).
2. Before composing a message, from the main Message screen
press
from the main Messaging screen to display
additional messaging options:
Messaging 128
•Search
: allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain
word or string of words. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or
phrase in which to search, then tap
. For more information, refer
to “Mes
sage Search” on page 137.
• Delete threads
: allows you to delete any message thread. Select the
messages to delete and a green check mark will appear next to the
message. Tap
Delete
. For more information, refer to “Deleting a single
message thread” on page 136.
• Draft messages
: displays the draft messages folder and its contents.
• Locked messages
: displays the locked messages folder and its
contents.
• Scheduled messages
: displays the scheduled messages folder and its
contents.
• Spam messages
: displays the spam messages folder and its contents.
• Settings
: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more
information, refer to “Messaging Settings” on page
137.
3. From the Messaging screen list, touch and hold an on-screen
message and select an option:
• Delete
: deletes the entire message and its bubbles.
For more information, refer to “Deleting a single message bubble” on
page 136.
•View contact
: allows you to view the current entry information for the
sender.
• Add to contacts
: allows you to add the sender to either a new or
existing Contacts entry.
129
• Add to spam numbers
: allows you to tag a number as spam so that
these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder.
Options while in a current message
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Messaging
).
2. From within an open message, press to display additional
messaging options:
• Insert smiley
: allows you to add insert smiley icons images
(emoticons).
•Add text
: allows you to add text items from sources such as: S
Memo, Calendar, Location, Contacts, and Text templates.
•Preview
(only in MMS): allows you to add preview the MMS
message prior to delivery.
• Add to contacts
: allows you to add the sender to either a new or
existing Contacts entry.
•View contact
: reveals the current Contact’s overview screen.
• Add slide
: converts an SMS message into an MMS (Multimedia)
message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow.
• Remove slide
: allows you to remove a previously attached slideshow.
• Add subject
: allows you to enter a subject.
• Duration (5 secs)
(only in MMS): allows you to change the duration of
the image slideshow.
• Layout (bottom)
(only in MMS): allows you to change the layout.
• Add recipients
: allows you to enter additional recipients to the
message.
Messaging 130
• Scheduling
: allows you to schedule a time for the current message to
be delivered.
• Add to spam numbers
: allows you to tag a number as spam so that
these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder.
•Discard
: closes the current open message.
Note:
You must be logged into your Samsung account prior to using
the S Translator feature.
•Translate
: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can both assign
the sender’s original language and assign a target language for the
recipient (they will receive your message in the designated language).
–
Enable the translate feature then configure the available options as
desired. Tap
OK
to store the new settings.
Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap (
Attach
) and select
one of the following options:
•
Image
: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add it
to your message.
•
Take a picture
: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a photo
with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by tapping
Save
.
•
Video
: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,
then
add it to your message
.
•
Record video
: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a
video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it to your message
by tapping
Save
.
131
•
Audio
: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list,
then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the
audio so that it turns green, then tapping
Done
.
•
Record audio
: allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an
audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then automatically attached
to the message.
•
S Memo
: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.
•
Calendar
: allows you to add an event from your calendar.
•
Location
: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your
location.
•
Contacts
: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry, then
add it to your message by tapping
Done
.
Adding Additional Text
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and events from
your Contacts, Calendar, or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press
Add text
.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
•S Memo
: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.
•Calendar
: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a calendar
event to your message.
•Location
: allows you to add an address and the link to the location on
Google Maps.
•Contacts
: allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your
contacts to your message.
• Text templates
: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and sentences.
For more information, refer to “Text Templates” on page 145.
Messaging 132
The information is added to your message.
Viewing Newly Received Messages
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by displaying
within the Notification area at the top left of your Home
screen.
To read a message:
1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For more
information, refer to “Notificat
ion Bar” on page 42.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
then tap the new message to
view its contents. The selected message displays on the
screen.
2. Tap
to play a multimedia message.
•
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap .
3. In a single motion, touch and drag up or down the page to
scroll through the message (if additional pages were added).
133
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture
messages are grouped into message
threads. Threaded messages allow
you to see all the messages
exchanged (similar to a chat
program) and displays a contact on
the screen.
Message threads are listed in the
order in which they were received,
with the latest message displayed at
the top.
To reply to a text message:
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. While the message is open, tap
the
Enter message
field and
then type your reply message.
3. Compose your reply.
Current Recipient
My Text
Reply Bubble
Text Message Thread
Your texts are colored Blue and your caller’s replies are Grey.
4. Tap (
Send
) to deliver your reply.
– or –
Press and then select one of the available message
options (
page 128).
Messaging 134
To access message thread options:
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the message
to display the following options:
• Delete
: deletes the currently selected message thread.
•View contact
: displays the Contact’s Overview page.
•Add to contact
: begins the process of adding the new number to your
Contacts list.
• Add to spam numbers
: adds the current sender to a spam list. ny new
texts from this sender are automatically blocked.
To access additional Bubble options:
Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message
conversation to display the following options:
• Delete
: deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread.
•Copy
: copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread.
•Forward
: allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble
to an external recipient.
•Lock/Unlock
: locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble
from being accidentally deleted.
•Copy to SIM
: copies the currently selected message bubble as a single
text message within the SIM card.
• View message details
: displays details for the currently selected
message bubble.
•Translate
: translates the text from the currently selected bubble into a
desired language.
135
Deleting Messages
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the Messaging screen, touch and hold a message from
the Messages list, then select
Delete
.
2. At the prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to exit.
Deleting multiple message threads
1. From the Messaging screen, press and then tap
Delete
threads
.
2. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A check mark
displays beside each selected message.
3. Tap
Delete
.
4. At the prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to end the process.
Deleting a single message bubble
1. From the Messaging screen, open a message to reveal the
message string.
2. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select
Delete
.
3. At the prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to exit.
Deleting multiple message bubbles
1. From the Messaging screen, open a message to reveal the
message string.
2. Tap
(
Delete
) then select each message bubble you want
to delete. A check mark displays beside each selected
message.
3. Tap
Delete
.
4. At the prompt, tap
OK
to delete or
Cancel
to end the process.
Messaging 136
Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the Message
Search feature.
1. From the Messaging screen, press
and then tap
Search
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which
to search, then tap
.
3. All messages that contain the entered search string display.
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia messages,
Voicemails, and Push messages.
From the Messaging screen, press and then tap
Settings
.
The following Messaging settings are available:
General settings
• Delete old messages
: deletes old messages when the limit is reached,
rather than overwriting them.
• Text message limit
: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages are allowed in one conversation.
• Multimedia message limit
: allows you to set a limit on how many
multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.
• Text templates
: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and sentences.
For more information, refer to “Text Templates” on page 145.
137
Text message (SMS) settings
• Manage SIM card messages
: allows you to manage the messages
stored on the SIM card.
• Message center
: allows you to enter the number of your message
center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to
deliver them.
• Input mode
: allows you to set the input mode for your text messages.
Choose from: GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings
• Group messaging
: when this option is activated, this feature allows you
to send a single message to multiple recipients.
•Auto retrieve
: allows the message system to automatically retrieve
messages.
• Roaming auto retrieve
: allows the message system to automatically
retrieve while roaming.
•Creation mode
: allows you to select the creation mode: Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
–
Restricted
: you can only create and submit messages with content
belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
–
Warning
: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are
creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content
Domain.
–
Free
: you may add any content to the message.
•MMS alert
: alerts you when the messaging modes changes from an
SMS (text) to MMS (multimedia) mode.
Messaging 138
Display
• Bubble style
: allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your
messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each
message.
• Background style
: allows you to choose from several background
styles for your messages.
• Use the volume key
: allows you to change the text size by using the up
or down volume keys.
Push message settings
•Push messages
: allows you to receive push messages from the
network.
Cell Broadcast (CB) settings
• CB activation
: allows you to receive CB messages.
• Channel configuration
: once activated, you can configure your
receiving channels.
Notification settings
• Notifications
: allows you to see message notifications on your status
bar.
• Select ringtone
: allows you to set the ringtone for your message
notifications.
•Vibrate
: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with
message alerts.
• Message alert repetition
: allows you to set the interval for new
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or
Every 10 minutes.
139
• Preview message
: when enabled, allows you to view a brief preview of
new message text on the Status bar.
Emergency message settings
• Emergency alerts
: allows you to configure emergency alert settings.
You can enable/disable those alert categories you wish to receive.
Choose from: Extreme alerts, Severe alerts, and AMBER alerts.
Note:
The Presidential alert can not be disabled.
• Emergency notification preview
: allows you to play a sample
emergency alert tone. Tap
Stop
to cancel the playback.
• Alert reminder
: when enabled, this function allows you set an alert
reminder for emergency notifications. Choose from: Once, Every
2 minutes, Every 15 minutes, and Off.
Signature settings
• Add signature
: when enabled, this feature allows you to create a
signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
• Signature text
: allows you to enter a desired signature for your
message.
Spam message settings
• Spam settings
: when enabled, allows you to configure available spam
settings such as:
–
Add to spam numbers
: allows you to manually enter and assign a
phone number as being sent from a spam source.
–
Add to spam phrases
: allows you to assign a specific text phrase as
belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
Messaging 140
–
Block unknown senders
: when active, automatically blocks incoming
messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.
Emergency Alert Configuration
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from
the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS); which may also be
known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network (PLAN). If your
wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are
available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside
your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically-
targeted messages. Alert messages are provided by the US
Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of
imminent threats to their safety within their area. There is no charge
for receiving an Emergency Alert message.
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
•
Alerts issued by the President
•
Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life
•
AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)
Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts, Severe Alerts,
and AMBER Alerts.
Important!
Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled.
141
To disable Extreme, Severe, and AMBER Alerts:
1. From the Messaging screen, press and then tap
Settings
.
2. Scroll to the bottom and select
Emergency alerts
. All alerts are
enabled by default (check mark showing).
3. Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the
check mark.
Assigning Messages as Spam
You can now assign either a phone number as spam or use a key
term or phrase. Any message assigned as spam is automatically
placed with your Spam messages folder.
To assign a phone number from Messages list as spam:
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Touch and hold a message from a phone number.
3. Select
Add to spam numbers
and tap
OK
.
To assign a phone number manually as spam:
1. From the Messaging screen, press and then tap
Settings
.
2. Locate and activate the
Spam settings
option.
• Spam settings
: when enabled, allows you to configure available spam
settings such as:
3. Tap
Add to spam numbers
(
Add
).
•
This function allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number
as being sent from a spam source.
Messaging 142
4. Tap the
Number
field to manually enter phone number.
– or –
Tap
to select from either your existing Logs or Contacts.
– or –
Tap
Match criteria
and select a parameter that must match for
the spam action to take effect. Choose from: Same as, Starts
with (ex: 800 or 888), Ends with, or inc
l
udes.
5. Tap
Save
.
To register text phrases as spam:
Some incoming messages might not be associated with a phone
number but rather an email address. In these cases, the only way to
block those messages, would be assign a key used term or phrase
to activate the Spam block. Ex: “Dear friend”, “Stock Alert”, or “Act
Now”.
1. From the Messaging screen, press
and then tap
Settings
.
2. Locate and activate the
Spam settings
option.
3. Tap
Add to spam phrases
(
Add
).
•
This function allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to
a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
4. Enter a term or word into the field.
5. Tap
Save
.
143
To register unknown numbers as spam:
Some incoming messages might not be associated with either a
phone number or email address. These incoming messages contain
no information as their info is blocked by the sender.
1. From the Messaging screen, press
and then tap
Settings
.
2. Locate and activate the
Spam settings
option.
3. Tap
Block unknown senders
. A green check mark indicates the
feature is active.
• Block unknown senders
: when active, automatically blocks incoming
messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.
If an incoming message is designated in coming from an unknown
sender, it is automatically assigned as spam and is now located in
your Spam folder.
Accessing Your Spam Folder
Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your
Spam messages folder.
From the Messaging screen, press and then tap
Spam
messages
.
Messaging 144
Text Templates
This screen displays your available text message reply templates.
This is a readily accessible list of both default and user-defined text
snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. From the Messaging list, press
and then tap
Settings
Text templates
.
3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current
message conversation.
To create your own text template:
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. From the Messaging list, press
and then tap
Settings
Text templates
.
3. Tap
(
Create text template
).
4. Enter a new text string and tap
Save
.
Using Email
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email
using several email services. You can also receive text message
alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email
application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts
simultaneously in one convenient location.
There are currently three main types of email accounts on your
phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and
Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook
®
).
145
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to access your
corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private Network), you will first
need to set up an IMAP or POP account.
•
IMAP
(Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently
used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current
standard.
•
POP3
(Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs
(Internet service providers) and common among consumer applications.
POP3 is the current standard.
•
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
- This protocol is frequently used with a
large corporate email server system and provides access to email,
contact, and calendar synchronization.
Creating an Internet Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Email
).
2. If you already have other email account setup:
•
Open an existing email account, press and then tap
Settings
(
Add account
).
Messaging 146
Account name
Access available
accounts and
folders
Email functions
– or –
Enter your
Email address
and
Password
information.
• Email address
: your Internet email address.
• Password
: typically your network access password (case-sensitive).
3. Tap
Show password
to display the password as you enter it in
the associated field.
•
Tap
Manual setup
to configure your connection settings manually
(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the
information specific to your email provider.
•
Tap
Send email from this account by default
to assign this email
account as your default account for all outgoing emails.
4. Tap
Next
.
5. At the
Account options
screen, select the frequency which the
device should check for new email on the server and tap
Next
.
Important!
The
Sync Email
feature must be enabled to allow synching
between your device and the remote server.
147
•
Tap the
Notify me when email arrives
field to receive new email
notifications.
•
Tap the
Automatically download attachments when connected to
Wi-Fi
field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when
using Wi-Fi.
6. At the
Set up email
screen, name the account and enter a
screen name to identify yourself on this account.
•
The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other
email accounts accessed by your device.
7. Tap
Done
to store the new account.
Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You can also
view Pe
rsonal information for this account, Receipts (if you setup the
account to return receipts), Travel information, and more (if
available).
Opening an Email
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Email
).
2. Tap
(account name field upper-left) to open the
complete email account list page.
•
Selecting
Combined view
allows you to view all the emails for your
current accounts, managed by the application, to be listed on a single
screen.
3. Select an email account and tap an email message.
Messaging 148
Refreshing Email messages
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Email
).
2. Select an email account.
•
If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field
(upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.
•
Select an available email account.
3. Tap (
Refresh
).
Composing Email
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Email
).
2. Tap (account name field upper-left) to open the
complete email account list page.
3. Tap
Inbox
(
Compose
).
4. Enter the recipient’s email address in the
To
field.
•
If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate the
email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
recipients as you want.
5. Tap
Cc/Bcc
to add additional carbon copy and blind copy
recipients.
•
Use the
Cc
field to carbon copy additional recipients.
•
Use the
Bcc
field to blind copy additional recipients.
6. Tap the
Subject
field and enter the email subject.
149
7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
•
To add an attachment (such as image, video, audio, etc..),
tap
Attach
(from the top of the screen) and make a category
selection.
–
Tap the file you wish to attach.
–
Tap to delete the attached file.
Note:
If you attach an image to your email, you have the option to
resize it prior to delivery. Choose from: Original, Large (70%),
Medium (30%), or Small (10%). Once chosen, tap either
Always
or
Just once
.
8. Tap
(
Save
) to store a draft of the current email on your
device so that you can come back later and continue the email.
9. Tap
(
Delete
) to discard the current email.
10. Once complete, tap
(
Send
).
Configuring Email Settings
1. From the Hom
e screen, tap
(
Email
).
2. Select an account.
3. Press
and then tap
Settings
and alter any of the following
General settings:
•Display
: allows you to configure the way in which your email list is
displayed. Options include: Auto fit content, Message preview line, and
Title line in list.
• Composing and sending
: allows you to configure the functions
available during both creating and sending emails. Options include:
Quick responses, Default image size, Delay email sending.
Messaging 150
• Auto advance
: allows you to assign an action after an email is deleted.
Choose from: Next email, Previous email, or Email list.
• Confirm deletions
: requires that you provide confirmation before
deleting a selected email.
• Priority senders
: allows you to assign Contacts as priority senders, set
as the default folder, assign email notifications, ringtones, and vibration
patterns for emails from these senders.
•Spam addresses
: allows you to create a list of spam email addresses.
• Rules for filtering
: allows you to create and manage filters for emails.
Filter parameters include: Filter name, Subject includes, or From.
– or –
4. Press
and then tap
Settings
Account settings
Account
. Alter any of the following settings:
• Sync settings
: allows you to adjust the email synchronization settings,
adjust the sync schedule, and adjust the email retrieval size.
•Signature
: lets you both attach a customized signature and include a
handwritten signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails.
–
In a single motion touch and slide the
Signature
slider to the right to turn
it on.
–
Tap the
Signature
field, change the current text, and tap
Done
to save
the new signature.
• Default account
: Assign this account as the default email account used
for outgoing messages.
• Password
: allows you to update your password to match the one on the
email server.
151
• Email notifications
: Activates the email notification icon to appear
within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email (Gmail,
etc..) is received.
• Select ringtone
: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message
is received.
•Vibrate
: Activates a vibration when a new email message is received.
5. Tap the
More settings
field to access additional options:
• Account name
: displays your uniquely created account display name.
•Your name
: displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing
email messages.
• Always Cc/Bcc myself
allows you to include your own email address in
either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of
outgoing emails.
•Show images
: allows you to view embedded images located within the
body of the currently displayed email.
• Security options
: allows you to enable several security options such as:
Encrypt all, Sign all, Create keys, Private keys, Public keys, and Set
default key. These security policies could restrict some functions from
corporate servers.
• Number of emails to load
: allows you to select the number of on-
screen emails to keep loaded on the screen by default.
• Auto download attachments
: allows the device to automatically
download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is
detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails
attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network
connection.
Messaging 152
• Auto resend times
: enables the device to resend an outgoing email a
specified number of times if delivery fails.
• Incoming settings
: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such as
User name, Password, IMAP server, Security type, Port, and IMAP path
prefix.
• Outgoing settings
: Lets you specify outgoing email settings, such as
SMTP server, Security type, Port, Require sign-in, User name, or
Password.
Note:
Some the above options may not be displayed when using some
Internet account types.
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)
Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook
Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email application to
wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and Calendar
information directly with your company’s Exchange server.
Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Email
).
2. If you already have other email account setup:
•
Open an existing email account, press and then tap
Settings
(
Add account
).
– or –
Enter your
Email address
and
Password
information.
• Email address
: your Outlook work email address.
153
• Password
: typically your network access password (case-sensitive).
3. Tap
Show password
to display the password as you enter it in
the associated field.
4. Tap
Send email from this account by default
, to make this your
default email account for outbound emails.
Note:
If selected, the
Manual setup
button changes to read
Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync
. If activated, skip to step 6.
5. Tap
Next
. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further
details and support.
6. Tap
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
(from the add new email
account screen).
Note:
If prompted with an on-screen notification that the connection
that the “Setup could not finish”, tap
Edit details
to continue
with a manual update of necessary information.
7. When prompted to provide additional detailed information
within the Exchange server settings screen, enter an updated
Domain
, and confirm your
user name
and
Password
information.
Important!
Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot
and enter a Domain name before the “
[Domain]\[user
name]
” entry. Most servers only provide a username.
Messaging 154
8. Update or re-enter your
Exchange server
information within the
appropriate field. This field can often be populated with
incorrect or out of date information provided by your server.
• Exchange Server
: your exchange server remote email address.
Typically starts with
mail.XXX.com
. Obtain this information from your
company network administrator.
Important!
Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on
returned information.
•
If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the
Use secure connection
(SSL)
field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional
level. Most often, this option should be enabled.
Important!
If your Exchange server requires this feature, leaving this
field unchecked can prevent connection.
9. Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to enable the
Use client certification
option.
10. With the new server information entered, tap
Next
.
11. Read the on-screen
Activation
disclaimer and, when prompted,
tap
OK
. The device then verifies your incoming server settings.
12. If prompted, read the
Remote security administration
information and tap
OK
to accept the service and continue.
13. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap
Next
.
It may take a few seconds for the next screen to load.
155
•
Enabling the
Automatically download attachments when
connected to Wi-Fi
option decreases the wait time to access large
email attachments.
14. If prompted, read the
Activate device administrator?
screen and
tap
Activate
to complete the email setup process.
Note:
This process can take a few minutes. If the previous setup
screen re-appears,
ignore it and do not alter any fields
during
this process.
15. Identify your new work email account with a unique name
(Ex: Work), then tap
Done
.
Opening an Exchange Email
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Email
).
2. Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete
email account list page.
3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email message.
Refreshing Exchange Email
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Email
).
2. Select an email account.
•
If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field
(upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.
•
Select an available email account.
3. Tap (
Refresh
).
Messaging 156
Composing Exchange Email
For more information, refer to “Composing Email” on
page 149.
Deleting an Exchange Email Message
Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and then tap
(
Delete
).
Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings
1. From the current Email inbox listing, press and then tap
Settings
.
2. Alter any of the following General settings:
•Display
: allows you to configure the way in which your email list is
displayed. Options include: Auto fit content, Message preview line, and
Title line in list.
• Composing and sending
: allows you to configure the functions
available during both creating and sending emails. Options include:
Quick responses, Default image size, Delay email sending.
• Auto advance
: allows you to assign an action after an email is deleted.
Choose from: Next email, Previous email, or Email list.
• Confirm deletions
: requires that you provide confirmation before
deleting a selected email.
• Priority senders
: allows you to assign Contacts as priority senders, set
as the default folder, assign email notifications, ringtones, and vibration
patterns for emails from these senders.
•Spam addresses
: allows you to create a list of spam email addresses.
157
• Rules for filtering
: allows you to create and manage filters for emails.
Filter parameters include: Filter name, Subject includes, or From.
– or –
3. From the current Email inbox listing, press
and then tap
Settings
Account settings
<Exchange email account>
.
Alter any of the following settings:
• Sync settings
: allows you to adjust the email synchronization settings,
adjust the sync schedule, and adjust the email retrieval size.
•Signature
: lets you both attach a customized signature and include a
handwritten signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails.
–
In a single motion touch and slide the
Signature
slider to the right to turn
it on.
–
Tap the
Signature
field, change the current text, and tap
Done
to save
the new signature.
• Out of office settings
: allows you to configure your out of office email
settings.
• Default account
: assign this account as the default email account used
for outgoing messages.
• Password
: allows you to update your password to match the one on the
email server.
• Email notifications
: activates the email notification icon to appear within
the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email (Gmail, etc..) is
received.
• Select ringtone
: plays a selected ringtone when a new email message
is received.
•Vibrate
: activates a vibration when a new email message is received.
Messaging 158
4. Tap the
More settings
field to access additional options:
• Account name
: displays your uniquely created account display name.
• Always Cc/Bcc myself
allows you to include your own email address in
either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of
outgoing emails.
•Show images
: allows you to view embedded images located within the
body of the currently displayed email.
• Auto download attachments
: allows the device to automatically
download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is
detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails
attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G/LTE network
connection.
• Auto resend times
enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a
specified number of times if delivery fails. The default is 3 auto resends.
• Folder sync settings
allows you to configure the sync settings for
various folders such as Inbox, Drafts, Outbox, etc..
• Period to sync Calendar
assigns a period for your phone to sync
calendar events. Choose from:
2 weeks, 1 month
,
3 months
,
6 months
, or
All calendar
.
• Empty server trash
: allows you to delete your email account’s trash bin
remotely.
• In case of sync conflict
allows you to assign the master source on
emails. If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign
the server as the main source for all emails (
Server has priority
) or
assign the phone to be the main source and update the server
accordingly (
Device has priority
).
159
• Security options
: allows you to enable several security options such as:
Encryption, Encryption algorithm, Sign, Sign algorithms, Email
encryption cert, Email signing cert, and Security policy list. These
security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.
•Sync Contacts
synchronizes the contacts between your device and the
remote exchange server.
•Sync Calendar
synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between
your device and the remote exchange server.
• Sync Task
synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your
device and the remote exchange server.
• Exchange server settings
provides access to the Domain\user name,
Password, and Exchange server settings.
5. Press to return to the previous page.
Messaging 160
Using Google Mail
Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first
setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized with
your Gmail account.
Signing into Google Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Gmail
).
Note:
You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access
features such as Google Mail and Play Store.
2. Tap
New
if you do not have a Google account.
– or –
Tap
Existing
if you have a Google account.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
Opening Gmail
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Gmail
).
2. Tap an existing email message.
Refreshing Gmail Mail
From within the Gmail message list, press and tap
Refresh
at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen, send
and receive new emails, and synchronize your email with the
Gmail account.
161
Other Gmail Options
From the main Gmail screen, tap (
Search
) at the bottom
of the screen to search through your Gmail messages.
Composing a Gmail Message
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Gmail
).
2. From the Gmail Inbox, tap (
Compose
) at the bottom of
the screen to create a new message.
3. Enter the recipients Email address in the
To
field.
Tip:
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.
4. Press
and select
Add Cc/Bcc
to add a carbon or blind
copy.
5. Enter the subject of this message in the
Subject
field.
6. Tap the
Compose email
field and begin composing your
message.
7. Once complete tap
(
Send
).
Viewing a Gmail Message
From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view the following
options located on the screen:
•Archive
: archives the selected Email.
• Delete
: deletes the currently selected Email.
• Mark as Unread
: tags the current message as unread and returns
you to the Google Mail Inbox.
Messaging 162
Section 7: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your
device, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, Samsung
Link, and how to manage your photos, images and sounds.
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in
camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG format.
Important!
Do not take photos of people without their permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not
allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with
another person’s privacy.
Note:
An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video
since there is already built-in storage.
Assigning the Default Storage Location
Important!
Too many users can overlook this storage location until
something goes wrong. It is recommended that you verify
this location or change it before initiating the use of the
camera or camcorder features.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Camera
).
2. Press
and then tap
Settings
(
Settings
) and scroll
up to the
Storage
entry.
Multimedia 164
3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location
for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose from:
Device
or
Memory card
.
Note:
It is recommended that you set the option to
Memory card
.
4. Press
to return to the Home screen.
Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the camera
key.
Note:
When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions,
shadows may appear on the photo.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Camera
).
2. Using the device’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust
the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
Note:
On your initial activation of the camera, firmware configuration
can take up to 1 minute. This is a one time process.
3. Before you take a picture, use the
Up
and
Down
Volume keys to
zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up to x4 (400
percent).
– or –
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to zoom in.
165
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap on-screen
icons to access various camera options and settings.
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area
of interest.
6. Tap (
Camera
) until the shutter sounds. (The picture is
automatically stored within your designated storage location
(
page 164). If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored on
the Device.)
For more information, refer to “Camera Options”
on page 167.
Note:
Touch and hold to take a burst shot. These are saved using
a Fine image quality.
Self-portrait
Camera mode
Battery
Charge
Quick Settings
Take
Picture
Image viewer
Effects Mode (Change)
Record video
Viewfinder
button
Multimedia 166
Camera Options
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen.
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button
MODE MODE
to
change the mode to one of the following:
–
Auto
: Use this mode to automatically adjust the exposure, color, and
brightness settings. This mode allows single image shots or burst shots.
–
Beauty face
: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for gentler
images.
–
Best photo
: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time, and then
choose the best photos among them. Press the Shutter button to take
multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap and hold thumbnails of photos
to save, and then tap Done.
–
Continuos
: Use this to take alot of pictures in rapid succession.
–
Best face
: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same time and
combine them to create the best possible image. Press the Shutter button
to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap the yellow frame on
each face, and choose the best individual face for the subject. After
choosing a pose for each individual, tap Done to merge the images into a
single photo, and tap Save.
–
Sound & shot
: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding background
sounds for a few seconds. The background sound is recorded for up to 9
seconds after taking the photo.
–
Rich tone (HDR)
: Use this to take photos with richer colors and contrasts
by merging images taken at different exposure levels.
–
Eraser
: Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any passers by.
167
–
Panorama
: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the Shutter
button to take a photo, and then move the camera in any direction. When
the blue frame aligns with the preview screen, the camera automatically
takes another shot in the panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press
the Shutter button again.
–
Sports
: Use this to take fast action photos.
–
Night
: Use this to take brighter, clearer pictures in low light settings
without the use of the flash.
2. From the top of the camera, the following shortcuts are
available for the camera:
Focus area
: displays the area of the image used as the
main focus area. If the image is too close, the square
will turn red.
Self portrait
: allows you to set the front camera so
you can take pictures of yourself.
Quick Settings
: activates the Quick Settings menu
bar from where you can select several additional
settings.
For more information, refer to “Quick
Settings” on page 169.
Image viewer
: allows you to access the Image
viewer and the various viewing options for a
selected picture. The last picture you took, will be
displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.
Multimedia 168
MODE MODE
Effects/Downloads
: provides access to pr e-installed
and downloaded effects. Default effects include:
No effect, Vignette, Posterize, Solarize, Blue, Red/
Yello, Grayscale, and Sepia.
Camcorder button
: shoots a video when pressed.
Camera button
: takes a photo when pressed in
Camera mode.
Mode button
: allows you to select from different
camera modes.
Connection Status
: indicates the device is connected
to an adapter.
Quick Settings
Tap at the top of the display to quickly change Camera
settings. Not all of the following options are available in both still
camera and video camera modes. The available options vary by
mode.
Camera settings
:
configure Camera settings.
Flash
:
activate or deactivate the flash.
169
Night detection
:
use this activate/deactivate night
detection.
Voice control
: activate or deactivate the voice
control to take photos.
Recording mode
:
select a resolution for videos.
Choose from: Normal or Limit for MMS.
Share functions
:activate or deactivate the sharing
options. Choose from Off, Share shot, Buddy
photo share, ChatON photoshare, and Remote
viewfinder.
Share shot - Shooting mode
: lists the current
shooting modes available from with the Share
Shot mode. Choose from Easy connect,
Wi-Fi Direct, or Cancel.
Quick Settings
: hide Quick settings.
Multimedia 170
Camera and Camcorder Settings
This section describes the different settings that you can configure
on your camera. Not all of the following options are available in both
still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary by
mode.
1. From the viewfinder, tap (
Quick Settings
)
(
Camera Settings
).
2. The follow settings are located under the Camera, Camcorder,
and General tabs. The settings that are displayed will depend
on what camera mode you are in.
Camera
:
•Photo size
: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher resolution for
higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up more memory.
• Face detection
: allows you to adjust the camera focus based on face
detection technology.
•Metering
: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters the
light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.
•ISO
: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera.
Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a lower ISO number to
make your camera less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take
photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera automatically adjust the
ISO for each of your shots.
•Anti-shake
: compensates for camera movement.
•Save as
: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.
171
Camcorder
:
•Video size
: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution for
higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more memory.
Settings
:
• GPS tag
: attach a GPS location tag to the photo. To improve GPS
signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed,
such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather
conditions. Your location may appear on your photos when you upload
them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.
•Review
: set this option if you want to view each picture after you take it.
Select a time value.
•Volume key
: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose from The
zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.
•Timer
: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to Off, 2
sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
• White balance
: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a
true-to-life color range. The settings are designed for specific lighting
situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance
exposure in professional cameras.
•Exposure value
: allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the
slider.
• Guidelines
: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when
selecting subjects.
•Flash
: activate or deactivate the flash.
Multimedia 172
•Voice control
: activates/deactivates voice control feature that allows you
to verbally take a photo.
• Contextual filename
: allows you to have your location added as part of
the filename. You must first activate GPS tag described above.
•Save as flipped
: when set to On, this option allows you to take and save
a mirror-image video when using self-recording mode.
•Storage
: Select the memory location for storage.
• Shutter sound
: Turn the shutter sound on or off.
• Reset
: Reset the camera settings.
Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options
After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various
options.
Photo viewing options
1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture.
Note:
If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the
picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.
2. The following options are available at the top of the screen:
• Change player
: allows you to select a different AllShare/
Samsung Link device from your available list.
•Share via
: allows you to share the picture via ChatON, Group
Play, Bluetooth, Drive, Email, Gmail, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging,
Picasa, S Memo, and Wi-Fi Direct.
173
•Edit
: allows you to edit the current image. Launches the Photo
Editor application.
For more information, re
fer to
“Editing a Photo”
on
page 187.
• Delete
: allows you to delete the current picture.
3. Press for additional options such as:
–
Edit
: (in Portrait mode) allows you to edit a photo.
–
Favorite
: allows you to assign the current image as a favorite.
–
Slideshow
: allows you to see your photos in a slideshow.
–
Photo frame
: takes the current image and creates a surrounding photo
frame that can be edited with edited text or drawn object, then saved.
–
Photo note
:
allows you
to write notes on your current image and then
save it.
–
Copy to clipboard
allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different
folder.
–
Print
: allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung
printer.
–
Rename
: allows you to rename the current file.
–
Buddy photo share
: allows you to share the current image with active
ChatON buddies.
–
Rotate left
: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
counterclockwise direction.
–
Rotate right
: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
clockwise direction.
–
Crop
: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current
picture. Tap
Done
to update the image with the new dimensions or tap
Cancel
to ignore any changes.
Multimedia 174
–
Set as
: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo, Home
screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens.
–
Details
: files details such as Title, Type, Date, Album, Size, Resolution,
Orientation, Manufacturer, Model, Flash, Focal length, White balance,
Aperture, Exposure, ISO, and Path.
–
Settings
: provides access to the Gallery options menu. Choose from SNS
data management, Tags, and Sound & shot.
Video viewing options
Note:
If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the
picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.
1. Tap a video to select it.
2. Tap
to play the video.
– or –
Select any of these on-screen options:
•Share via
: allows you to share the video via ChatON, Bluetooth,
Drive, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picasa, Wi-Fi Direct, or
YouTube.
•Trim
: activates the Trim feature so that you can edit the length of
the current video.
• Delete
: allows you to delete the current video.
Choose either
OK
or
Cancel
.
3. Press for additional options.
175
( )
Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a camcorder
that also allows you to record, view, and send high definition videos.
Shooting Video
Tip:
When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light
by having the light source behind you.
Note:
The camera may not be able to properly record videos to a
memory card with a slow transfer speed.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Camera
) to
activate the camera mode.
2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust
the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.
3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control buttons to
zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up to x4 (400
percent).
Note:
Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread/pinch the
screen to zoom in or out.
For more information, re
fer to
“Navigating Through the Screens” on page 52
.
4. Tap the Video key to begin shooting video. The red light
will blink while recording.
Multimedia 176
( )
( )
5. Tap anywhere on the screen to re-focus the camera on that
object. The camcorder auto-focuses on the new target area.
6. To capture an image from the video while recording, tap
.
This feature is not available while the anti-shake feature is
activated.
7. Tap the Stop key to stop the recording and save the
video file to your Camera
folder.
– or –
Tap the Pause key to pause the recording.
8. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer, then tap
(
Play
) to playback your video for review.
9. Press
to return to the viewer.
Accessing Videos
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder. You
can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the
Camera folder.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video
playback.
3. Tap (
Play
) to begin video playback.
– or –
Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select
the video (indicated by a colored border) and display the
following video menu context options:
177
•Share via
: allows you to share the video via ChatON, Bluetooth,
Drive, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picasa, Wi-Fi Direct, or
YouTube.
• Delete
: allows you to delete the current video.
Choose either OK or Cancel.
– or –
Touch and hold a listed video file to place a checkmark
alongside and then press
for additional options:
–
Slideshow
:
allows you to see your files in a slideshow or access the
slideshow settings.
–
Copy
: allows you to create a duplicate of the currently selected file.
–
Move
: allows you to move a selected file to a new location.
–
Hide items
: allows you to hide selected items.
–
Show hidden items
: allows you to show selected items that were
previously hidden.
–
Rename
: allows you to rename the filename of the currently selected
video.
–
Details
: displays video file information.
– or –
With the video displayed on-screen (but not playing), press
for additional options:
–
Favorite
: tags the current video as a favorite file
.
–
Slideshow
:
allows you to see your files in a slideshow or access the
slideshow settings.
Multimedia 178
–
Rename
: allows you to rename the filename of the currently selected
video.
–
Details
: displays video file information.
–
Settings
: provide access to the Galley settings page. From this page you
can configure the SNS data management, Tags, and Sound & shot.
Sharing Pictures
Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment, but an even
better treat is to share them with others.
Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series of
pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture without using
email or messaging.
•
Share Shot
is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures among a
group of users. The best example for this feature is having multiple users
instantly sharing each others pictures at a company or family gathering.
As each person takes a separate picture with their own device, they are all
pooled together and instantly appear in each user’s Gallery.
No more “Email your pictures to me later”. Each person walks out of the
event with all the pictures taken by everyone.
This method of image transfer requires that both devices have Wi-Fi Direct
active and be paired prior to use.
Note:
You can only share a shot with other external users who also
have their Wi-Fi Direct feature active.
179
•
S Beam Transfer
uses the NFC (near Field Communication) feature found
on your device to transmit large files directly to another compatible device
by
direct touch
.
This method of image transfer requires NFC and S Beam to be enabled
prior to use.
For more information, refer to
“Using S Beam to Share Pictures”
on
page 183.
Enabling Share Shot
Share shot is a Wi-Fi Direct group sharing feature where multiple
users can Wi-Fi connect their devices and then all share each others
pictures in real-time. This is really useful in group events (ex: family
gathering or company party) where you don’t want to have to email
everyone later and make sure you all can share your pics at a later
date.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings” on
page 295.
The general process is:
•
Enable Wi-Fi Direct communication
•
Pair your device with other users
•
Enable Share shot
To enable Wi-Fi Direct:
Important!
The target device must already be connected to the same
Wi-Fi and have its Wi-Fi Direct feature active and scanning
before you can your pairing.
1.
From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab.
Multimedia 180
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Wi-Fi
slider to the right to
turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status.
3. Tap
Wi-Fi Direct
.
4. Tap
Scan
and select the single device name to begin the
connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
– or –
Tap
Multi-connect
Scan
and select all the device names to
begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible
devices.
Note:
The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and
running before it can be detected by your device.
5. Tap
Done
. The direct connection is then established. Confirm
appears in the Status bar.
6. When prompted to complete the connection, the recipient
should tap
OK
. Your status field now reads “Connected” and
your connected device is listed within the Wi-Fi Direct devices
listing.
7. Each partner (including yourself) must then tap
Accept
to
consent to the new Wi-Fi Direct pairing.
To enable Share shot on Camera:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Camera
) (
Quick
Settings
) (
Share
) (
Share shot
).
2. If you are prompted to activate your Wi-Fi Direct connection,
tap
OK
and follow the activation procedures for Wi-Fi Direct.
181
To configure your Share Shot options:
1. Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active ( appears at
the top of the screen).
2. Tap (
Devices for sharing with
) to display list of current
share shot participants.
•
Stop sharing images with select participants by tapping their entry and
removing the green check mark.
3. Tap (
Shooting modes
) to regain access to the Share
menu.
4. Tap
Off
to disable share shot while maintaining a Wi-
Fi Direct connection.
To take share shot images:
1. Tap (
Camera
) until the shutter sounds.
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
) to
locate your newly shot images located in their default storage
location.
•
External users will be able to locate their images in either a downloaded
or
RECV
(received) folder.
3. Confirm (
Share shot images delivered/received
) appears
in the Notifications area of the screen.
Multimedia 182
Using S Beam to Share Pictures
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files
directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These
files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large
files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files
from your music player, and more.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab.
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the
NFC
slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Tap
S Beam
and make sure the feature is turned on.
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the
S Beam
slider to the right to turn it on.
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or video),
tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the preview
window.
Important!
Neither device can be in Lock mode or displaying the Lock
screen. They must both be active and unlocked. It is
recommended that the target device be on the Home
screen.
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back to
begin.
183
Note:
If the
Touch to beam
screen does not appear on the source
device:
- Pull them apart
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on
the source device (providing the file)
- Place them together again
8. From the
Touch to beam
screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer. After a few seconds (depending
on file size) the recipient with then see the transferred file
displayed on their screen.
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or video),
tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
2. Locate the selected folder.
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a check mark on it
and all desired images.
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back to
begin.
5. From the
Touch to beam
screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.
Multimedia
184
Camera Gallery Options
The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera
images.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
2. Select a folder location (ex:
Camera
) and tap an image to open
it.
– or –
Touch and hold an image to place a checkmark on the file and
select multiple files.
– or –
Tap the upper-right camera to begin taking pictures that are
placed in this folder.
– or –
Tap the on-screen image to use additional image menu
options.
Sharing a Gallery Image to a Target Device
Important!
Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the
same Wi-Fi.
1. Launch Samsung Link on the target device (such as an Internet
TV, Samsung Tablet, etc..).
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
Note:
You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can
use this feature.
185
3. Open a selected image.
4. Tap (
Stream to connected devices
) and select an available
target device to begin streaming.
5. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the on-screen
Allow
button to continue.
Note:
At this stage your device is requesting access to share media
with the external source.
6. Confirm (
AllShare Controller enabled
) appears in the
Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are
using your device as the media source.
Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press
and then tap
Set as
Contact photo
.
4. Tap a contact to make a selection.
5. Use the on-screen crop the ima
ge by dragging it around or out
from its corners.
6. Tap
Done
to store the new image.
Multimedia 186
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press and then tap
Set as
.
4. Select one of the these options:
• Home screen
assigns the current image to the home screen
background. This image is spread across all available screens.
•Lock screen
assigns the selected image to the background for the lock
screen.
• Home and lock screens
assigns the current image to both the Home
screen and Lock screens.
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture. Touch
and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a
cropped area.
6. Tap
Done
to assign the wallpaper image.
– or –
Tap
Cancel
to stop without updating the wallpaper image.
Editing a Photo
You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor application
on your device. The photo editor application provides basic editing
functions for pictures that you take on your phone. Along with basic
image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also provides a
wide variety of effects used for editing the picture.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press
187
and then tap
Edit
.
•Edit
: allows you to edit the current image. Launches the Photo Editor
application.
Note:
To select the picture area, touch and hold the current picture.
4. Select an image area by touching and holding the image and
then selecting an available option:
• Selection mode
: provides several on-screen selection options such as:
Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and Selection mode
(Magnetic, Lasso, Brush, Round, and Square), Select all, and Clipboard.
• Select all
: select the entire area of the current image.
•Clipboard
: copies the currently selected are to your device’s clipboard.
5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:
Previous
: lets you undo the current operation.
Next
: lets you redo the previous operation.
Cancel/Delete
: exits the current photo editing
session.
Save
: stores the currently edited photo.
Rotate
: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.
Multimedia 188
Crop
: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a
photo.
Color
: allows you to Auto adjust color, Brightness,
Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,
Exposure, and Hue of a photo.
Effects
: allows you to add various effects to your
photo.
Portrait
: allows you to apply various face
correction effects such as: Red-eye fix, Airbrush
face, Face brightness, Out-of-focus, Beauty face,
Face reshaping, or Spot healing.
Sticker
: allows you to place various pre-created
on-screen stickers atop your current image.
Drawing
: allows you to add draw directly on your
current picture by using either a brush/pen or
eraser.
Frame
: places a pre-created border style atop
your current image.
6. Press
to access the following options:
•Save as
: allows you to rename your current image and save it to your
gallery.
• Select image
: allows you to select a new image for editing.
• Take picture
: allows you to activate the camera and take a new image
for editing.
189
•Share via
: allows you to share your saved photo via Bluetooth, ChatON,
Drive, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+, Group Play, Hangouts,
Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.
•Set as
: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact photo,
Home and lock screens, Home screen, or Lock screen.
The Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow,
set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture
message.
Note:
If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing
the Gallery, access
Files
and remove some of the media files
from the folders, and then open the Gallery.
Opening the Gallery
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
). For
more information, refer to “Camera Gallery Options” on
page 185.
Note:
If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage
card, Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top
left album contains all the pictures in the storage card.
Multimedia 190
Section 8: Applications and
Development
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is already
described in another section of this user manual, then a cross
reference to that particular section is provided.
Note:
This manual only addresses applications that have been loaded
on your [device/computer/tablet] as of the date of purchase.
Information concerning third party applications that you may
choose to download from the Google Play Store or otherwise
should be obtained from the application provider directly.
Tip:
To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-used
applications to one of the Home screens.
For more information,
refer to “Customizing the Screens” on pa
ge 44.
You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that
will display on all Home screens. If you add an application as a
primary shortcut, the application icon will not be displayed in the
Applications menu.
Applications and Development 192
Applications
The Applications list provides quick access to all the available
applications on the device.
The Application menu p
rovides quick access to the most frequently
used applications. Applications display on each of the panels on the
Applications screens.
Important!
Once you log into your Google account. All previously
downloaded apps should now be populated within the
Application screens.
Application Screen Menu Settings
When on the Apps screen, the following menu options are available:
1. Press and then tap (
Apps
).
2. Press
and then select from the following options:
•Play Store
: provides quick access to the Play Store (page 247).
•Edit
: allows you to organize your current applications by moving them
around the screen, edit or delete existing Apps folders.
• Create folder
: allows you to create an application folder where you can
better organize and group desired apps.
• Uninstall/turn off apps
: allows you to uninstall a user-downloaded
application or turn off selected applications. Only those applications that
are not default to the device can be downloaded.
Tap
to remove the selected app.
• Downloaded applications
: allows you to filter the view of apps to only
those applications that you have downloaded.
193
•View type
: allows you to customize the way the Apps menu listing is
shown.
•Share apps
: allows you to share information about selected applications
with external users.
• Show turned off apps
: allows you to specify which previously turned off
applications are can be reactivated again for viewing in this menu. Once
you have selected the apps, tap
Done
.
3. Press
to return to the Home screen.
Accessing Recently-Used Applications
1. Press and hold from any screen to open the
recently-used applications window.
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
Tap
to go to the Task manager.
– or –
Tap
to go to Google Search.
– or –
Tap
to delete the record of all recently used applications.
Applications and Development 194
Shutting Down an Currently Active Application
Press and hold (
Home
) and then tap (
End all
)
– or –
1. Press and hold (
Home
) and then tap
(
Task manager
).
2. From the
Active applications
tab, tap
End
to close selected
applications.
– or –
Tap
End all
to close all background running applications.
Task Manger Overview
Press and hold (
Home
) and then tap
(
Task manager
). This screen contains the following tabs:
–
Active applications
display those currently active applications running
on your phone.
–
Downloaded
displays any installed packages or applications from the
Play Store that are taking up memory space. Tap
Uninstall
to remove
them from your phone.
–
RAM
, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you to
Clear memory
.
–
Clear defaults
allows you to clear the current default applications.
–
Storage
displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space
within the System storage and external SD card.
195
Calculator
Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a
scientific calculator.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
Calculator
).
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
Plus,
Minus, Multiplication,
or
Division
key.
4. Enter the next number.
5. To view the result, tap the
= (equals)
key.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.
Note:
Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional
scientific functions.
Calendar
With this feature, you can consult the calendar by day, week, or
month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder. Google
Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and
existing entries between your phone and your online Google account.
Important!
You should previously add an account (Facebook, Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the
Calendar.
Applications and Development 196
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Calendar
).
The following tabs are available on the right side of the display:
•Year
: displays the Year view.
•Month
: displays the Month view.
•Week
: displays the Week view.
•Day
: displays the Day view.
•List
: displays the events in a List view.
•Task
: allows you to search for tasks.
2. Tap (
Create event
) to create a new Calendar event.
– or –
Tap
Today
to display the current date indicated by a blue box,
then press
and select one of the following options:
•Go to
: displays a specific date.
• Delete
: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or an
individual event.
•Search
: allows you to search within your current events.
•Sync
: allows you to synchronize your current calendar events across
available accounts.
•Calendars
: synchronizes your current calendar events with your
available accounts (such as Gmail, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,
etc..).
• Settings
: displays a list of configurable settings.
197
Creating a Calendar Event
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Calendar
).
2. Within the Year, Month, Week, and Day tabs, (
Create
event
) to create a new Calendar event.
Calendar Settings
Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you
want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to view the
calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to manage
events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) .
2. Press
Settings
.
3. Tap
View styles
and select an option.
•
Tap
Month view styles
and select an option.
•
Tap
Week view
and select a type.
4. Tap
First day of week
and select either
Locale default, Saturday,
Sunday
or
Monday
.
5. Tap
Hide declined events
to activate this option. A check mark
indicates selection.
6. Tap
Lock time zone
(to lock event time based on your current
user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from within the
Select time zone
field.
7. Tap
Show week number
to display the week numbers along the
side of the week entries.
8. Tap
Set alerts and notifications
to adjust the event notification
method. Choose from:
Alert
,
Status bar notification
, and
Off
.
Applications and Development 198
9. Tap
Select ringtone
to assign a ringtone to a calendar event
notification.
10. Tap
Vibration
to assign a vibration notification to this event.
11. Tap
Quick responses
to edit your default quick responses for
outbound emails. These are default responses similar to those
used by text templates.
Camera
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG
format. The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format.
Note:
A microSD card is not necessary before you take pictures or
shoot video.
It is recommended that you confirm your default storage
location for images and videos.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Camera
).
199
ChatON
Provides a global mobile communication service where you can chat
with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. With this service you can
send pictures, videos, animation messages (Scribbles), audio,
Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location information. Create special
animated messages for your friends using handwritten messages,
text, photos, background images and music.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
ChatON
).
2.
Log in to the service and follow the on-screen instr
uctions.
For more information, visit:
https://web.samsungchaton.com
.
Registering with the Service
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
ChatON
).
3. If prompted to connect via a mobile network, tap
Connect
.
4. Tap
Sign in
to log into your Samsung account
– or –
Tap
Skip
to continue without logging in.
5. Read the on-screen notification about data charges and tap
OK
.
6. Select a country code, enter your current phone number to
register with the service, and tap
Register
.
7. Choose to receive the verification code via either
SMS
(text
message) or
Voice
(answering machine call) to your device.
Applications and Development 200
Note:
If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS, this
information is sent directly to your device. Once received, the
Verification
field is automatically filled in.
8. Enter your name and tap
Done
.
9. Review the
Terms and conditions
and tap
Accept
to continue.
10. Tap
Sign in
to log into your Samsung account
– or –
Tap
Not now
to continue without logging in.
Adding Your First Chat On Buddy
1. From the
ChatON
application screen, tap (
Add buddy
) and
choose a search method.
• Suggestions
: provides a list of suggested buddies that you might know.
•Tell friends
: to send current buddies a download link so that they can
then install ChatON.
• Phone number
: to search by Country code and phone number.
• Search by ID
: to search by using a known Samsung account ID.
2. Select a country code if it differs from yours.
3. Enter the information and tap
(
Search
). Once the
recipient is matched, their entry appears in the
Results
area.
4. Tap
(
Add
) and confirm your new buddy appears in the
Buddies tab.
201
Using ChatON for Chatting
1. From the
ChatON
application screen, tap the Buddies tab.
2. Select a buddy by tapping the Chat image to initiate your chat.
3. Enter your message using the on-screen text entry method.
4. Tap
(
Send
).
To reply to a ChatON message:
1. While the chat session is active, tap the
Enter message
field
and then type your reply message.
2. Compose your reply.
Your texts are colored Blue and your buddy’s messages are
white.
3. Tap (
Send
) to deliver your reply.
Deleting a single message bubble
1. From the
ChatON
application screen, launch a chat session to
reveal the message string.
2. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select
Delete
.
Chrome
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google Chrome Web
browser on your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
Chrome
).
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap
Accept and
Continue
.
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap
Sign in
to bring
your open tabs, bookmarks, and data from your computer to
your phone, otherwise tap
No thanks
.
Applications and Development 202
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google Chrome.
Clock
Here you can set an Alarm, configure and view the World clock, use
a Stopwatch, set a Timer, or use a Desk Clock. The applications
display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a
finger.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Clock
).
Setting an Alarm
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Clock
).
2. From the
Alarm
tab, tap (
Tap to create an alarm
).
3. Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour, and minutes,
then tap
AM
or
PM
(toggles depending on which was last
selected).
4. Tap the alarm repeat area and touch the number of times you
want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: day blocks or
Repeat
Weekly
. Selected day blocks turn blue when active.
5. Tap the
Alarm type
field and select one of the following:
Melody
,
Vibration
,
Vibration and melody
, or
Briefing
.
6. Tap
More
to reveal addditional options.
7. Tap the
Alarm tone
field and either select an available tone or
select
Add
to use locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone.
Tap
OK
to activate the ringtone.
8. Slide the slider bar left or right in the
Alarm volume
field to
decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the
volume level plays.
203
9. Move the
Location alarm
slider to the right to activate the
feature, then follow the on-screen instructions to enter a
location. When activated, the alarm only sounds when you are
at a specific location.
10. Move the
Snooze
slider to the right to activate the feature. Tap
the field to assign a
Interval
time (3 minutes, 5 minutes,
10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 30 minutes) and
Repeat
(1 time,
2 times, 3 times, 5 times, and 10 times).
•Interval
indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between
alarm notifications (snooze time).
• Repeat
indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to
this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence the alarm.
11. Move the
Smart alarm
slider to the right to activate this feature
which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of
nature tones to simulate dawn breaking.
Tap the field to assign a interval time (1 minute, 3 minutes,
5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 30 minutes) and nature
tone (Fairy fountain, Birdsong by the lake, Sparkling mist, The
secret forest, Serenity, or Gentle spring rain).
•Interval
category describes the length of time the alarm will remain
silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).
•Tone
category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as
the alarm tone.
12. Tap the
Name
field and enter a name for this Alarm.
13. Tap
Save
to store the new alarm event.
Applications and Development 204
Turning Off an Alarm
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and slide to
any direction.
Setting the Snooze Feature
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds, touch
and slide
to any direction. Snooze must first be set in
the alarm settings.
Deleting an Existing Alarm
1. From within the
Clock
application, touch and hold an on-
screen alarm event.
2. Tap
Delete
.
World Clock
This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of
world.
1. From within the
Clock
application, tap the
World clock
tab.
2. Tap
Add city
then scroll and select the desired city, or tap in the
search field to locate a city.
To assign DST settings:
1. Locate a desired city from the World clock list.
2. Touch and hold a city and select
DST settings
.
3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, or 1 hour).
If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol appears
next to the World Clock city listing.
205
Stopwatch
This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the
stopwatch keep running.
1. From within the
Clock
application, tap
Stopwatch
tab.
2. Tap
Start
to start the stopwatch counter.
3. Tap
Lap
to begin the lap time counter.
4. Tap
Stop
to stop the counter.
5. Tap
Restart
to restart the lap counter. You can have multiple lap
times.
6. Tap
Reset
to reset the counter.
Setting a Timer
1. From within the
Clock
application, tap
Timer
tab.
2. Tap the
Hours
,
Minutes
, or
Seconds
field and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the hour, minute, or seconds. The
timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown.
3. Tap
Start
to start the timer.
4. Tap
Stop
to stop the timer or
Reset
to reset the timer and start
over.
5. Tap
Restart
to resume the timer counter.
Configuring a Desk Clock
This feature lets you activate an on-screen clock that can be viewed
when the device is docked.
1. From within the
Clock
application, tap
Desk clock
tab. The
default Desk clock is displayed.
Applications and Development 206
Note:
You might have to scroll across the tabs to locate the Desk clock
tab at the far right.
2. To make changes, press
and then tap
Settings
. The
following options are displayed while in full-screen mode:
•Calendar
: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap to
uncheck.
•Weather
: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and weather
condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on.
•Dock
: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock sound, Audio
output mode, Desk home screen display, Automatic unlock, and Audio
output. For more information, refer to
“Accessory”
on page 337.
3. Tap
to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.
4. To make changes in full screen mode, press
and then
tap:
• Edit shortcuts
: allows you to edit the shortcuts shown at the bottom of
full screen mode.
• Hide shortcuts/Show shortcuts
: allows you to hide or view the current
on-screen shortcuts located along the bottom of the full screen mode.
• Settings
: provides access to the Desk clock settings menu from where
you can alter the following: Hide status bar, Wallpaper, Calendar,
Weather, and Dock.
207
Contacts
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Contacts
).
Downloads
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Downloads
).
2. Place a checkmark on an available file to select it.
3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort by size/
date, or Clear list.
Drive
Also known as Google Drive, this application is a file storage and
synchronization service provided by Google. This service enables
user access cloud storage and enable file sharing.
1. Log into your existing Goolgle account.
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Drive
).
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your drive.
Applications and Development 208
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using most email
services. The device alerts you when you receive an email message.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Email
).
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow,
set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture
message.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gallery
).
209
Gmail
Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your device. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize with
your Gmail account on the Web.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gmail
).
Creating a New Google Account
You should create a Google
™
Account when you first use your device
in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account provides access
to several device features such as Gmail
™
, Hangouts
™
, and the
Google Play Store
™
applications. Before you are able to access
Google applications, you must enter your account information. These
applications sync between your device and your online Google
account.
Signing into Your Google Account
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account (such as
Play Store or Gmail).
2. Click
Existing
.
3. Tap the
Email
and
Password
fields and enter your information.
4. Tap
(
Sign in
). Your device communicates with the Google
servers to confirm your information.
5. If prompted, you can enable the option to stay up to date on
news and offers, then tap
OK
.
Applications and Development 210
Opening Gmail
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Gmail
).
2. Tap an existing email message.
Google
Use Google Search to search the Web. Google Now
®
(a part of the
Google application) recognizes a user’s repeated actions performed
on the device (including access of common locations, repeated
calendar appointments, search queries, etc.). This information is
then used to display more relevant information to the user in the
form of “cards”. These scrollable on-screen cards are displayed
when the Google Now application is launched.
These cards are not manually added. The service uses your GPS,
Google Search, and usage information to generate these cards
automatically.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Google
) and
enter the search text.
– or –
Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search
information.
To initially set up Google Now:
1. Press and hold (
Home
) and then tap (
Google Now
).
– or –
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Google
).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to review the available
information.
211
3. When prompted, agree to launch the application. Some initial
on-screen “cards” are shown. A default is the Weather card
that provides updated weather information in your area.
To configure the Google Now settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Google
).
2. Press
and select
Settings
.
3. Access each desired Sett
ings page and configure it as desired.
When these condition are met, new card information will begin to
appear in the Google Now list of cards.
Note:
Google Now will recognize searches and display them on your
device, even if that search took place on your home computer or
on another device. These searches are linked into your Google
Account.
Google Settings
As Google has become more intertwined with other applications, this
menu provides a quick and ready access point to configure
preferences for Google+, Maps, etc.. You can also use the Search
function to initiate a Google Search from this menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Google
Settings
) and select an on-screen option.
2. Select one of the available on-screen options.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Applications and Development 212
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot
easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get
updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with
everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically
upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
Google+
).
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+.
– or –
Tap
Add account
to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit
www.google.com/mobile/+/
for more information.
Note:
Google+ instant upload may resize your images in order to
reduce size.
Group Play
This application lets you share documents, photos or music in real-
time with other connected friends.
Note:
Group Play is not the same as Screen mirroring which requires a
connection to a Wi-Fi capable Samsung TV.
Important!
To share a Group Play, all users must be connected to the
same Wi-Fi access point.
213
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Group Play
).
2. Read the on-screen Disclaimer and tap
Agree
.
3. Follow the on-screen tutorials.
Creating a group
If you have media you want to share, create a group for other users
to join to and then share/collaborate with what you are sharing.
The creator
of the group is the leader and it the source of the shared
file. All other joined members can then interact with the
file being
shared.
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your
other participants are also connected to this same Wi-Fi.
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Group Play
).
3. Tap the
Set group password
field to enable the function which
requires users to enter a password prior to connecting to your
new group.
4. Tap
Create group
. If previously selected, enter your group
password and tap
OK
. Mobile AP is enabled.
5. Tap one of the media items listed under the
Share and play
content
heading.
6. Tap to select the items you want to share (indicated by a
checkmark), then tap
Done
or
OK
.
7. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their devices (see
below) and they can view your media using you as a Mobile AP.
Applications and Development 214
Joining a group
A joiner is the participant of an already created group. You can only
view and interact with media shared by the leader of an existing
group.
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your
connection is this same Wi-Fi as the group leader.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
Group Play
).
3. Tap
Join group
. Your device then scans for available groups for
you to join.
4. Select a group to join. Once connected, you can then select the
shared content and interact with your group’s shared media.
Hangouts
Previously known as Google Talk™, is an updated place to hangout,
share photos, and even video calls. This is a free web-based
application for instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation
logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail
accounts.
Note:
Before using this application, you must first have an active
Gmail account available and be currently logged in.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Hangouts
).
Note:
Make sure you are logged into your Google account.
215
2. When prompted, read the on-screen information and confirm
your phone number is correct before using the application. Tap
Confirm
.
Note:
Confirming your phone number does not make it publicly
available.
Internet
Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the
mobile Web. This section explains how to navigate the browser and
use the basic features.
Accessing the Internet
To access the Browser:
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Internet
).
Navigating with the Browser
1. Tap an entry to select an item.
2. Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion to
scroll through a website.
3. To return to a previous page, tap
.
4. To move forward to a Web page, tap .
Browser Options
1. From the top of the browser screen, select one of the available
options:
• Navigation
: use the forward and back buttons to navigate through your
browsing activity.
•Refresh
: reloads the current page.
Applications and Development 216
• Window manager
: displays a list of the windows you have open.
• Bookmarks
: provides access to the Bookmarks screen.
– or –
From the home page, press
to access the following
options:
•Homepage
: displays the home Web page.
•New window
: launches a new browser window. By default, this screen
shows the home page.
•Add bookmark
: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.
•Edit bookmark
: allows you to edit an existing bookmark.
• Add shortcut
: creates a shortcut for the current site onto an available
screen.
• Save page
: allows you to store the current page in memory so that it
can be read later even if you loose your Internet connection. It is saved in
your Saved pages folder.
•Share via
: allows you to share the page using Bluetooth, ChatON, Copy
to clipboard, Drive, Email, Gmail, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging,
S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Find on page
: allows you to search in the current page.
• Incognito mode
: pages viewed in incognito mode won’t appear within
your browser history or search history, and no traces (such as cookies)
are left on your device. For more information, refer to
“Going
Incognito”
on page 219.
•Saved pages
: provides quick access to the Save pages tab.
•History
: provides quick access to the History tab.
217
• Desktop view
: allows you to assign the browser to display the current
page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display as it would appear
on a Desktop computer).
•Brightness
: allows you to assign a brightness level specifically for the
browser window. This is independent of the brightness assigned within
the device’s Settings menu.
•Print
: provides print access on compatible Samsung printers.
• Settings
: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by
changing these options. For more information, refer to
“Browser
Settings”
on page 224.
Entering a URL
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites are
optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website:
From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen,
enter the URL and tap
.
Search the Internet
To perform an Internet search using keywords:
1. From within the Google search application, tap the
Google
search field, enter the keyword(s) to search using the
on-screen keypad.
2. Tap the entry from the list of search results that are displayed.
3. Tap a link to view the website.
Applications and Development 218
Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have several Internet windows open at one time.
To add a new window:
1. From your browser window, tap (
Window
)
(
New window
).
2. A new browser window displays.
Note:
The number of currently open windows is displayed at the
bottom of the Windows screen.
3. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows
and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window.
To delete an existing window:
1. From your browser window, tap (
Windows
).
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate your target
window.
3. Tap
next to the listing to delete the window.
Going Incognito
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the
normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito window won’t
appear within your browser history or search history, and no traces
(such as cookies) are left on your device.
Note:
Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your
device after you exit the incognito mode.
219
To add a new incognito window:
1. From your browser window, press and select
Incognito
mode
.
2. At the information prompt, tap
OK
.
3. A new browser window displays.
To exit from the incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap (
Windows
).
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito
window. The incognito icon
appears in the new browser
window while you are in this mode.
3. Tap
next to the incognito listing to delete this window.
Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly and
easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website addresses) of the
bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page. From the
Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and
view your History.
1. From the webpage, tap
(
Bookmarks
).
The
Bookmarks
page displays.
2. Press
to display the following options:
• List view/Thumbnail view
: select
Thumbnail view
(default) to view a
thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select
List view
to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.
• Create folder
: creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks.
•Delete
: erases selected bookmarks.
• Change order
: rearranges the current bookmarks.
Applications and Development 220
• Move to folder
: selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder.
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a
bookmark for the following options:
• Open in new window
: opens the webpage in a new window.
•Edit bookmark
: allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark.
• Add shortcut
: adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your
phone’s Home screen.
• Share link
: allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth, ChatON,
Copy to clipboard, Drive, Email, Gmail, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging,
S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete bookmark
: allows you to delete a bookmark.
• Set as homepage
: sets the bookmark to your new homepage.
Adding Bookmarks
1. From the webpage, tap (
Add bookmark
).
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark
and the URL.
3. Select a storage location for your new bookmark.
4. Update the title of the Bookmark and confirm the URL.
5. Tap
Save
. The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks
page.
Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark you
want to edit.
2. Tap
Edit bookmark
.
221
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or
the URL.
4. Tap the
Location
field (at the top) to assign a new folder
location.
5. Tap
Save
or
Cancel
to exit the operation.
Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark you
want to delete.
2. Tap
Delete bookmark
.
3. At the confirmation window, tap
OK
.
Emptying the Cookies
A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during
navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific information, a
cookie can also contain some personal information (such as a
username and password) which might pose a security risk if not
properly managed. You can clear these cookies from your device at
any time.
1. From an active Web page, press
and then tap
Settings
Privacy
Delete personal data
.
2. Tap
Cookies and site data
to create a checkmark.
3. Tap
Done
.
Applications and Development 222
Using Web History
The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites.
These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web
pages.
1. From an active Web page, Press
and then tap
History
.
2. Select a visited range category.
3. Tap an entry to display the webpage.
– or –
Press
and then tap
Clear history
to delete the current
History list.
Saved Pages
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites that you
have saved.
1. Press
and then tap
Saved pages
.
A list of your saved webpages is displayed with their Name.
The webpages that have been visited the most will appear at
the top.
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.
223
Browser Settings
To configure browser settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Internet
).
2. Press
and then tap
Settings
.
3. Choose an option from the following categori
es:
Basics:
• Set homepage
: sets the current home page for the Web browser.
• Auto fill forms
: allows you to set the text used for the Web form auto-fill
feature.
Privacy:
• Search and Web address suggestions
: displays predictions of related
queries and popular websites in the address bar as you type.
• Preload available links before opening
: allows you improve
performance when loading pages.
• Remember form data
: allows the device to store data from any
previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function.
• Remember passwords
: stores usernames and passwords for visited
sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
• Delete personal data
: allows you to delete all personal data such as
Browsing history, Cache, Cookies and site data, Passwords, Auto-fill
data, and Location access.
Applications and Development 224
Accessibility:
•Text scaling
: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text size using
a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap, and minimize the font
size using a slider bar.
• Force zoom
: allows you to override the website’s request to control
zoom.
• Text encoding
: adjusts the current text encoding.
• Full screen
: allows you to use Fullscreen mode to hide the status bar.
• Text booster
: allows you to boost the text size on PC websites to make it
easier to read.
Content settings:
• Accept cookies
: allows sites, that require cookies, to save and read
cookies from your device.
• Turn on location
: allows websites to request access to your location.
• Turn on JavaScript
: enables Javascript for the current Web page.
Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove the
checkmark to disable this function.
• Block pop-ups
: prevents popup advertisement or windows from
appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
• Default storage
: allows you to set your default storage to Device or
Memory Card.
• Website settings
: view advanced settings for individual websites.
• Turn on notifications
allows website notifications. Select Always on, On
demand, or Off.
• Clear notifications
: deletes website notification access information.
225
• Reset settings
: restores all settings to default.
Bandwidth management:
• Preload webpages
: allows the browser to preload Web pages. Choose
from Always, Only on Wi-Fi, or Never.
•Load images
: allows web page images to load along with the other text
components of a loaded website.
• Open pages in overview
: displays an overview of newly opened web
pages.
Local
Google Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your
location to help you find destinations, such as restaurants, bars,
hotels, attractions, ATMs, and gas stations. You can also add your
own locations.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
Local
).
The Welcome to Google Maps screen displays.
2. Tap and read
Terms of Service
and
Privacy Policy
, and then
touch
Accept & continue
.
3. Select to either
Sign in
or
Skip
.
4. Tap the
Search
field and use the on-screen keyboard to enter
and find a local address or business.
5. Tap
to search.
Applications and Development 226
6. Tap on one of the business categories (grocery stores,
pharmacy, atm location, or gas station) to search for a
particular business.
– or –
Tap
(
Services
) to display a more extensive list of nearby
businesses.
All of the business categories that are close to you will be
displayed.
7. Tap a business category in the list to see a map and more
details about each local business in that category.
A marker indicates the location of each business.
8. Swipe across the bottom of the screen to display additional
businesses.
– or –
Tap the name of the business to see more details about that
business, such as address, phone, website, and location. You
can also see reviews from around the web and from Google
users.
227
Maps
Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view real-time
traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions. There is also
a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a
specific address. You can view locations on a vector or aerial map, or
you can view locations at the street level.
Important!
Before using Google Maps you must have an active data
(3G/4G/LTE) or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps application
does not cover every country or city.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Maps
).
Important!
For best results, it is recommended that you enable all of
your location services.
For more information, refer to
“Location Services” on page 363.
Enabling a Location source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for
places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable the
location source you must enable the wireless network, or enable the
GPS satellites.
Important!
The more location determining functions are enabled, the
more accurate the determination will be of your position.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Location
services
.
Applications and Development 228
2. Tap
Access to my location
to enable sharing your location with
requesting applications.
3. Tap
Use GPS satellites
to enable the GPS satellite.
4. Tap
Use wireless networks
to allow apps to use data from
sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better
approximation of your current location.
5. Tap
My places
to enable the storage of your favorite locations.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
•
inside a building or between buildings
•
in a tunnel or underground passage
•
in poor weather
•
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
•
in a vehicle with tinted windows
Opening Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Maps
).
2. Tap
Accept & continue
from within the Welcome page.
3. Tap the bottom-right My location button to find your location
on the map with a blinking blue dot.
4. Locate the top row of the buttons to access additional options.
229
Messaging
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service (SMS)
to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile
phones.
You can also use the Multimedia Service (MMS) to create multimedia
messages to send and receive from other mobile phones.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Messaging
).
Music
The Music player is an application that can play music files. The
music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+,
MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the Music Player allows
you to navigate through your music library, play songs, and create
playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).
Playing Music
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Music
).
2. Tap a library category tab to select the music category:
Songs
,
Playlists
,
Albums
,
Artists
, or
Folders
.
3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.
4. Use any of the following Music player controls:
Pause the song.
Start the song after pausing.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
pr
evious song.
Applications and Development 230
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to
go to next song.
Volume control and SoundAlive.
Volume control showing volume muted.
Plays the entire song list once.
Replays the current list when the list ends.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.
Lists the current playlist songs.
Returns the user to the music categor
y screen.
Assign the current song as a Favorite.
Streams the current music file to another device
via Samsung Link.
Making a Song a Phone Ringtone
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Songs
tab.
2. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on-screen
context menu.
3. Tap
Set as
Phone ringtone.
4. Select
Done
.
Note:
Additional Set as options include
Caller ringtone
and
Alarm tone
.
231
Music Options
The Music settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music
player such as whether you want the music to play in the
background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays.
With the application displayed and playing a song, press
and select one of the following option
s:
• Via Bluetooth
: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset.
• Play via Group Play
: allows you to share music with others via the
Group Play application. All users must be connected to the same Wi-Fi.
For more information, refer to
“Group Play”
on page 213.
• Add to playlist
: allows you to add the current music file to a selected
playlist.
•Set as
: allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone, Caller
ringtone, or Alarm tone. Additionally you can either choose to start the
selected song from the beginning or allow the application to
automatically recommend a start point.
• Show/hide music view
: changes the screen appearance to the music
view and back.
• Settings
: allows you to change your music player settings.
•Details
: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title, Album, Track
length, Genre, Recording date, Track number, Format, Bit depth,
Sampling rate, Size, and Location.
•End
: closes the application.
Applications and Development 232
Music Settings
The settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player
such as whether you want the music to play in the background,
sound effects, and how the music menu displays.
1. From within the
Music
application, press
Settings
.
2. Select one of the following settings:
•Music menu
: this menu allows you to select which categories you want
to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Music square, Folders,
Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added.
Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu.
• SoundAlive
: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop, Rock,
Dance, Jazz, Classic, etc.
• Adapt Sound
: enable or disable the adaptive sound feature to adjust to
the sound levels of your current environment.
• Play speed
: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and 2.0X using
the slider.
• Music auto off
: when enabled, sets a timer for the Music application to
automatically turn off after a pre-selected amount of time.
•Lyrics
: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if available.
• Smart volume
: when activated, automatically adjusts each track’s
volume to an equal level.
•Voice control
: when activated, allows you to use voice control
commands to control the music player.
233
Using Playlists
Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.
These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device,
or using a third-party application (such as Windows Media Player)
and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device.
Creating a Playlist
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Press
and then tap
Create playlist
.
3. Delete the default playlist title and type a new name for this
playlist, then tap
OK
.
Adding Music to a Playlist
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
3. Tap
(
Add music
). This option is available within
user-created playlists.
Note:
If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song
name from the main screen to open the context menu. Select
Add to playlist
and choose the playlist.
4. Tap a music file, or tap
Select all
to add all the music tracks to
this playlist then tap
Done
.
Applications and Development 234
Removing Music from a Playlist
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
3. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context menu.
4. Tap
Remove
.
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can also
share, delete, or rename the playlist.
Note:
Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default
playlists can not be renamed.
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
3. Tap
Edit title
.
4. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap
OK
.
235
Transferring Music Files
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two
methods:
1. Downloaded to the device from the Play Store.
Music files are directly stored on your phone.
2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.
Removing Music Files
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Songs
tab.
2. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
3. Tap
Delete
OK.
The music file(s) is deleted.
Applications and Development 236
My Account Downloader
This application provides access to your current account
information.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
My Account
Downloader
).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the application.
3. Once installed, open the application and follow the on-screen
instructions.
My Files
This application allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one
convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if the
associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4).
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
My Files
).
Note:
Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with
folders, subfolders, etc.
Note:
The application lets you view supported image files and text
files on both your internal storage and microSD card.
237
Opening and Navigating within Files
DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device.
These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.
To open files:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
My Files
).
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your
selected file.
•Home tab
allows you to back up to the root directory.
•Up tab
allows you to back up into a higher directory.
•
Press and then tap
View by
to change the way the files are
displayed on-screen. Choose from:
List
,
List and details
, or
Thumbnail
.
•
Press for these additional options:
Select all
,
Create folder
,
Search
,
View by
,
Sort by
, and
Settings
.
To navigate:
1. Tap
All files
Device storage/SD memory card
to see the
contents of either device or your internal SD card.
2. The following folders may display:
•Alarms
: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.
•Android
: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android
applications.
•Bluetooth
: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.
•DCIM
: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken by the
device. Tap
DCIM
Camera
to view the picture or video files.
•Download
: this folder contains downloads you have made.
•Movies
: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.
Applications and Development 238
•Music
: this folder contains your Music files.
• Notifications
: this folder contains all of the notifications you have
received.
•Pictures
: this folder contains your photos.
•Podcasts
: this folder contains all of your podcasts.
•Ringtones
: this folder contains any ringtones you have purchased.
•SMemo
: this folder contains app info for S Memo.
Note:
Different folders may appear depending on how your phone is
configured.
3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to launch the
associated application.
239
Navigation
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system with
voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.
Note:
For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-speech
support from the Play Store.
Launching Navigation
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Navigation
).
Navigation Menu
While viewing a map:
Tap (
Menu
), in the lower left corner of the screen, for
options.
To configure Navigation settings:
1. Tap (
Menu
)
Settings
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
For more information tou
ch
(
Menu
)
Help
.
Phone
This application provides the ability to make or answering calls,
access the Contacts list, which is used to store contact information.
From the Home screen, tap (
Phone
).
For more information, refer to “Call Functions and Contacts List” on
page 58.
Applications and Development 240
Photos
This application (also known as Google Photos) provide a means for
automatically backing up your photos and videos to a centralized
Google cloud location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
)
(
Photos
).
2. Tap
Get started
and follow the on-screen prompts to configure
a connection method and other related parameters.
Play Books
Formerly known as Google Books, this application allows you to read
millions of ebooks on the go.
Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books: jump right
into a bestseller or select from nea
rly 3 million free ebooks.
Personalize the reader to your liking,
pick up r
eading where you left
off on your phone or computer, and
settle down with
a great book on
your Android phone!
Note:
You must logged into your Google accoun
t pr
ior to using this
feature.
From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
)
(
Play Books
).
Play Books Menu
Tap (
Menu
) for options.
To configure Play Books settings:
1. Tap (
Menu
)
Settings
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
For more information tap
(
Menu
)
Help
.
241
Play Games
This application takes you directly to the Play Store Games area from
where you can make purchases.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Play Games
).
2. Accept the Mobile terms of service for Google+ by tapping
Accept
.
3. Select from an available on-screen option.
Play Movies & TV
This application allows you to connect to the Play Store, download a
movie and then watch it instantly.
Choose from thousands of movies, including new releases and
HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your Android
device.
Movies, previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to
your My Movies library across your devices.
Learn more about Go
ogle Play Movies at:
http://play.google.com/about/movies
.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Play Movies & TV
).
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so.
A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list.
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and viewing
movies.
4. Tap
Watch Now
to search through available categories from
this screen.
Applications and Development 242
5. Tap
My Movies
to view movies you have rented.
6. Tap
My TV Shows
to view shows you have rented.
7. Tap
Shop
to purchase or rent material.
Play Music
Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop, and
playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The music you
choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and
instantly ready to play or download.
Access the new music tab from within your Play Store
application.
The Music application contains a music player that plays
music and
other audio files that you copy from your computer.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Play Music
).
The Music app searches both your online library and your
device’s internal storage for music and playlists; this can take
from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on the
amount of new music added since you last opened the
application. It then displays a carousel view of your new and
recent music, organized by album.
2. If prompted to join the service, select either
Not now
or
Try it FREE
.
3. Follow the on-screen log in screens.
4. Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the
Music application by tapping the Music application icon
(
Music notification icon
) at the top-left of the Application bar.
243
Searching for Music in Your Library
1. From within the
Play Music
application, tap (
Search
) to
search through your available songs.
2. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box.
3. Tap a matching song to play it, tap a matching album, artist or
playlist to view a list of its’ songs.
Tab Options
There are various options avai
lable from the various
tabs:
From within the
Play Music
application, select one of the
following tabs and tap to access an available option.
•GENRES:
Add to queue.
•ARTISTS:
Add to queue, Keep on device, Add to playlist.
•ALBUMS:
Add to queue, Keep on device, Add to playlist, or
Go to artist.
• SONGS:
Add to queue, Add to playlist, Go to artist, Go to album, or
Delete.
Playing Music
From within the
Play Music
application, tap a song in your
library to listen to it.
The
Now playing
screen opens and the song you touched or the
first song in the album or playlist starts to play. The tracks in
the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list
(unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops
only if you stop it, even when you switch applications.
Applications and Development 244
Note:
If you navigate away from the
Now playing
screen in the Music
application, the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the
screen.
Displaying the Now Playing Screen
If you navigate away from the
Now playing
screen, to return to the
Now playing
screen from other Music screens:
Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar.
– or –
In a single motion, touch and drag
(
Music notification
icon
) down from the Status bar and tap the song title from the
Notifications area. You can also pause and resume playback
and skip to the next song in the panel.
For more information,
refer to “Notification Bar” on page 42.
Making Online Music Available Offline
In addition to playing the music that you add to your online library,
you can play music stored on your device’s internal storage. Then
you can listen to music when you have no Internet connection. To do
this, make some of your online music available offline.
Tip:
You can also copy music directly from your computer to your
device.
To make your online music available offline on your device:
1. From within the
Play Music
application, change your library
view to Albums, Artists, or playlists.
245
2. Tap an entry then select and then select
Keep on device
to make available offline.
A blue pin
indicates that the item is already available
offline.
Dar
ker pins appear next to the items you can make available
offline. A bar at the bottom of the screen shows how much
space is available on your device for music and other files.
Dim blue pins indicate songs or albums that you copied
directly from a computer to your device.
3. Tap the dark pin next to each item you want to make available
offline or tap a blue pin to stop making it available offline. You
can switch to other views of your library to make other kinds of
items available offline as well.
4. Tap
Done
in the bar at the bottom of the screen. The Music
application starts downloading the items to your device.
Play Newsstand
With Google Play Newsstand, you can subscribe to and discover
more of your favorite news magazines, and have them available to
read on your device at any time or any place.
1. Log into your existing Google account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
)
(
Play Newsstand
).
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a magazine.
Applications and Development 246
Play Store
Formerly known as the “Android Market”, this application provides
access to downloadable applications and games to install on your
phone. The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and
comments about an application, or flag an application that might be
incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store, you must have a Google Account.
Accessing the Play Store
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Play Store
).
2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap
Next
.
3. Tap
Existing
and enter your Google account information.
4. Tap
Accept
to agree to the Play Store terms of service.
Downloading a New Google Application
To download a new application, you will need to use your Google
account to sign in to the Play Store. The home page provides several
ways to find applications. The home page features applications and
includes a list of item applications by category, a list of games, a link
to search, and a link to My apps.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Play Store
).
2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're
interested in, and tap the name.
3. Read the application descriptions.
247
Important!
If the selected application requires access to data or
control of a function on your device, the Play Store displays
the information the application will access.
Tap
OK
if you agree to the conditions of the application.
Once you tap
OK
on this screen you are responsible for
using this application on the device and the amount of data
it uses. Use this feature with caution.
4. Tap
INSTALL
ACCEPT
.
Note:
Use caution with applications which request access to any
personal data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage
times.
5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for the
application.
6. Check the progress of the current download by opening the
Notifications panel. The content download icon appears
in the notification area of the status bar.
7. On the main Play Store scree
n, tap
My apps
, tap an
installed application in the list, and then tap
OPEN
.
Tip:
The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list
and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to
Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list, or at the end of the list if
View type is set to Customizable grid.
Applications and Development 248
Note:
A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply.
Please contact your service provider for further details.
POLARIS Office 5
Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible
office suite. This application provides a central place for managing
your documents online or offline.
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document
Format) files.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
POLARIS
Office 5
).
2. From the Registration screen, enter your Email information
(if desired) and tap
Register
to complete the process.
– or –
Tap
Skip
to ignore this registration. The main Polaris Office
screen displays.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office.
4. On its initial launch, navigate the application to begin use:
•New
: creates a new office document.
•Menu
: provides access to Settings and Help.
• Recent documents
: provides a scrollable list of recently accessed
documents.
•Samples
: provides access to sample Word, PowerPoint, and Excel files.
•File Browser
: allows you to search on your device and SD card for
compatible documents.
249
•Form type
: allows you to quickly access your documents based on file
type. Each type is separated into several available tabs located at the
bottom of the screen, such as: Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Other, and PDF.
•Favorites
: allows you to list only those documents tagged as Favorite.
•View Together
: once connected to the same Wi-Fi, you can share or
collaborate with other Polaris users.
S Memo
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using the
keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice recordings,
and text all in one place.
Creating a New Memo
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
S Memo
). The
S Memo screen is displayed.
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to enter
edit mode.
– or –
Tap
to start a new memo in text mode with the keypad
displayed or tap
to start a new memo in drawing mode
using your finger or a compatible on-screen writing tool. You
can change back and forth in a memo to add text with the
keypad and the pen.
Applications and Development 250
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in the
following table:
Allows you to add free-format dr
awing.
Displays the keypad to you can add text.
Eraser tool allows you to erase
marks and drawings.
Undo the last action.
Redo the last action that was undone.
Cancel
Discards the current memo.
Save
Saves the current memo and creates a new one.
Changes the view mode.
Provides access to a quick selection bar. Choose from:
Take picture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, Cl
ip art. These
elements can be used within the memo.
Make a voice recording to add to the memo.
Add an additional page to the
memo.
3. From within an active memo, press
to access the
following options:
251
Note:
Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in keypad
mode, or in handwriting mode, the options will appear
differently. The following is a list of the options you may see.
•Delete
: allows you to delete the S Memo.
•Share via
: allows you to share your memo as either an Image file (.jpg),
PDF file (.pdf), Plain text, or S Memo file (.snb) via ChatON, Group Play,
Bluetooth, Hangouts, Picasa, Messaging, Google+, Email, Drive, or
Gmail.
•Export
: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either an Image
file or PDF file.
•Add to Favorites
: allows you to tag the current memo as a favorite.
• Create event
: allows you to link the memo to your Calendar events.
•Set as
: allows you to set a memo as a Contact icon, Home screen
wallpaper, Lock screen wallpaper, or Home and lock screens.
•Print
: allows you to print the screen or Web page on a Samsung printer
using Wi-Fi.
When you are finished creating your memo, tap
Save
on the top
menu bar.
Applications and Development 252
S Translator
Allows you can easily translate words and phrases (verbal or text
messages) into many different languages.
Note:
Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to
your Samsung account application.
For more information, refer
to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page 356.
1. From the Home
screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
S Translator
).
2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to log into your
Samsung account.
To translate text:
1. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar to select
your target/source language. Default is Spanish.
2. Tap the bottom language bar to select the destination language
that you would like to translate to. Default is English (US).
3. Enter text into the top box and it will automatically be
translated into the lower box.
4. Tap the selected
(
Translate
) button within the bottom
field. The top target language field is then updated with the
new translation.
To translate using your voice:
Important!
The two on-screen buttons at the bottom of the application
correspond to the two currently selected languages.
253
1. At the S Translator screen, tap the left voice button to verbally
speak the selected language (corresponds to top field).
2. Wait a few seconds until the on-screen notification shows
“Speak in...” then speak using the selected language.
3. Within a few seconds, confirm the translated text now appears
in the other translation field.
4. Tap the selected (
Speak
) button to translate using your
selected input language and voice.
•
Example, if trying to speak in English and get a Spanish translation, tap
the
Speak (English (US))
button and wait for the text to appear on-
screen.
5. Press for additional options. Choose from: TTS readout
speed, Auto readout, and Help.
S Voice
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition system that allows
you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the
phone. Features include: Call, Text, Navigate, Play music, Memo, and
Driving mode.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
S Voice
).
Using S Voice
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
S Voice
).
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer information and tap
Confirm
to
continue.
3. Review the Terms of Service and tap
Agree
to continue.
Applications and Development 254
4. Navigate through the following on-screen tutorial screens by
reading the information and tapping
Next
, or tap
Skip
to
continue without reading the information.
5. Wake up the application by repeating the phrase
Hi Galaxy
.
Note:
The wake-up command/phrase can be changed from “Hi
Galaxy” to anything else.
6. Tap (
Speak
) if the device does not hear you or to give
it a command.
Example 1:
•
I want to find the best pizza online.
•
Tap and say “Find me the best Pizza”. This launches an
Internet search.
Example 2:
•
I want to go to Cambridge.
•
Tap and say “Navigate to Cambridge”. This launches the Map
application and indicates where this is in relation to your current position.
255
Samsung Link
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile
phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on who
calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen monitoring.
Samsung’s Samsung Link makes staying connected easy.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with other
external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network
Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be
DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital
multimedia streamer.
AllShare/Samsung Link Definitions:
Samsung Link/
AllShare Play
This new feature builds on the
previous AllShare Play functionality. It
includes features such as Web storage
integration and social networking
integration. This is a Web service
that requires using a Samsung
account.
Group Play
A subset feature of Samsung Link, this
allows you to mirror photos and
multimedia presentations with other
members of your current Wi-Fi
group. Users must be on the same
Wi-Fi and provide an access code to
join the group.
Applications and Development 256
AllShare Cast
(with Hub
accessory)
This feature functions with an
external AllShareCast Hub to fully
mirror what is currently displayed on
your device to the external TV.
Important!
You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using this
application.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on
page 291.
For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 356.
Important!
The Samsung account manages the access information
(username/password) to several applications, such as
Samsung Link and Chat On.
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Samsung Link
).
3. If prompted with an on-screen notification about no Wi-Fi
detected, tap
Cancel
(to continue by using your network
connection) or
Connect
to continue.
4. Tap
Get started
.
257
5. Follow the on-screen prompts. Available tabs include: MY
RECENT CONTENT and DEVICES & STORAGE.
Configuring Samsung Link Settings
The Samsung Link™ application must first be configured prior to its
initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi,
Items to share, source server address, and external device
acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
)
(
Samsung Link
).
2. Press
and then tap
Settings
and configure the following
settings as desired:
•Registered storage
: allows you to add a Web storage location. Without
a storage service/location added, you will not be able to use Samsung
Link.
• My device
: allows you to rename your device within the Link application.
•Save to
: allows you to save your media to your internal phone memory
or to an SD card.
•Auto upload
: allows you to enable automatic upload of images from
your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage
list. Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature.
• Video optimization
: allows you to setup the video quality for streamed
video content. Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature.
• Password lock
: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link by
requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung
account password. Move the slider to the on position to activate the
feature.
Applications and Development 258
• My account
: displays Samsung account information.
• Customer support
: displays FAQ information.
• About this service
: displays application information.
Setting Up Web Storage
Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store your
files and share them on the “Cloud”.
Note:
If you are using another Web storage service, log into that
service first before using Samsung Link.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
)
(
Samsung Link
).
Note:
When adding storage, an N Drive is added (such as SugarSync,
Dropbox, or SkyDrive).
2. Press
and then tap
Settings
Registered storage
(
Add storage
) and choose from: SugarSync, Dropbox, or
SkyDrive.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into your
cloud service.
4. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web storage
icon or name appears in the Web storage area of the main
screen.
5. From the main screen, select a connected device and then tap
on the media that you would like to share.
259
•
A file with indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage
location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the file
currently stored on your services’ servers.
To de-register Web storage service:
1. From the Samsung Link application, press and then tap
Settings
Registered storage
.
2. Select
Deregister
(
Delete
).
3. Select a current storage service and tap
OK
.
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target Device
Important!
Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the
same Wi-Fi.
1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target device (such
as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc..).
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Samsung Link
).
Note:
You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can
use this feature.
3. Tap DEVICES & STORAGE and select your device name from
the
Registered devices
area.
4. Tap an available category tab and select a file.
•
A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web
storage location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the
file currently stored on your services’ servers.
Applications and Development 260
5. Tap (
Stream to connected devices
) and select an
available target device to begin streaming.
6. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the on-screen
Allow
button to continue.
Note:
At this stage your device is requesting access to share media
with the external source.
7. Confirm (
Samsung Link Controller enabled
) appears in
the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are
using your device as the media source.
Settings
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone.
It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra
settings associated with your phone.
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Settings
).
– or –
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 289.
261
Story Album
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your story in
media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if you wish, you
can have your album published as a hard copy.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Story Album
).
2. Read the introductory information and tap
Next
.
3. Tap
Start
to begin your Story Album.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Press and then tap
Help
for additional information.
Video
The Video player application plays video files stored locally.
Using Video
The Video application plays video files stored on the SD card.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Video
). A list
of available videos displays in the Video list.
2. Tap a video file to begin viewing.
Sharing Videos
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Video
).
After a few seconds, each on-screen video begins to cycle
through a preview of the first five seconds of the clip.
2. Press and then tap
Share via
.
3. Select either individual videos or tap
Select all
.
4. Click
Done
to complete the process or
Cancel
to quit.
5. Select a sharing option.
Applications and Development 262
Using Picture-In-Picture
This feature can be used during playback of supported video types
via either the Gallery, Play Videos, or Video player.
Note:
Some applications might not allow this video to remain active in
the foreground (ex: Camera/Camcorder screen).
This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a
background operation while you multi-task and do other things, such
as surf the Internet, access your Contacts list, look for a picture, etc..
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
).
2. Tap the desired video playback application.
3. Tap the desired video to begin playback.
Note:
The Picture-In-Picture feature only works when using the Video
player application. Other video players (ex: YouTube), do not
support this feature.
4. As playback is initiated, locate and tap
(
Picture-in-Picture
) from the bottom-right of the playback
screen. Your current video is then sent to foreground of any
new page and most application screens.
5. The video disappears from the screen once it ends.
263
Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one
minute long and then immediately send it as a message.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) ➔
(
Voice Recorder
).
2. Tap (
List
) to display a list of current recordings.
3. Tap (
Recording quality
) to adjust the recording quality.
Choose from: Normal or High quality recording.
4. Tap (
Record
) to record an audio file.
5. Tap (
Stop
) to stop recording. The file automatically saves
to the Voice list.
– or –
Tap (
Pause
) to pause the recording of an audio file.
– or –
Tap (
Cancel
) to cancel the recording of an audio file.
6. From the Recorded files page, press and then select one
of the following:
•Share via
and select a method in which to share this audio file. Refer to
each specific section, depending on the method you selected to send
this voice recording.
•Delete
: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap the
recordings to delete and tap
Delete
.
Applications and Development 264
• Settings
: the following settings are available:
–
Storage
: allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved.
Select between Device or memory card.
–
Recording quality
: allows you to set the recording quality to High or
Normal.
–
Limit for multimedia messages
: allows you to select On or Off. If you
Limit for MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can
be sent in a message.
–
Contextual filename
: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to adjust the
filename based on contextual information such as your current GPS
location.
–
Default name
: allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings.
For example, if your Default name is Voice, your recordings would be
named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003, etc.
–
Noise reduction
: allows you to activate/deactivate background noise
suppression.
–
Recording volume
: allows you to assign the ambient noise quality of
your current location so the device can better detect audio. Choose from
High or Low.
–
Channel
: allows you to assign recording mode to either Mono or Stereo.
–
Skip interval
: allows you to assign a skip length.
•End
: allows you to exit the application.
265
Voice Search
Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice to text
Internet searching.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) ➔
(
Voice Search
).
2. When prompted, speak into the built-in microphone.
3. Use the on-screen options to find a matching search term.
WatchON
Using WatchON
Important!
Before initiating use, verify you have an active Internet
connection available (either mobile network or Wi-Fi
connection).
Note:
Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,
confirm your TV is turned off.
For more information, refer to
www.samsungwatchon.com
.
Applications and Development 266
Initial Configuration
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) ➔ (
WatchON
).
Note:
If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile network.
Click
Connect
to proceed.
3. Select your desired country or region for your TV Guide’s
source listing.
4. Enter your current zip code and tap
Done
. This zip code must
correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box.
5. From the
Find your TV service
screen, select a service provider
from the available channel listing.
6. From the
Personalize
screen, you can either follow the on-
screen prompts to personalize your desired content or tap
Skip
to continue without customizing your content.
7. Read the on-screen Peel Disclaimer agreement and tap
Agree
to complete the set up process.
8. If prompted, walk through the on-screen tutorial information
and choose to
Continue Remote Setup
configuration.
267
Customizing Your Remote
1. From the top of the main screen, tap (
Remote Control
) ➔
Continue
.
2. From the
Select your TV brand
screen, tap your TV’s
manufacturer name.
•
If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector, select
from one of the following two options. Choose from either
Show other
brands
or
I have a home projector
.
3. Aim your device at the TV and tap (
Power
) to confirm the
set up process completed successfully and the correct TV IR
codes were selected.
Note:
The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10
seconds. Please do not press the button again.
4. If the TV turned on, tap
Yes, this code works
.
– or –
If the TV did not turn on after tapping
(
Power
) and
waiting 10 seconds, tap
No, test next code
or
Send this code again
.
5. From the
Select your channel source
screen, select the entry
that corresponds to your current channel control method:
• Set-top Box
: selected when changing channels is done via a receiver
box. Channels are not changed via the TV remote but rather through the
receiver/box.
Applications and Development 268
• My xxx TV
: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV and no box
is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by using the TV remote
and not a box’s remote.
Note:
Try matching your current channel selection method.
6. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list. For
example, DirectTV
®
.
•
If your brand does not appear in the list, tap
Show other brands
and
follow the on-screen instructions.
Important!
You must configure your set top box for IR communication
with your device. If you do not select
More info
below and
follow the on-screen instructions you may not be able to
properly use the application.
7. When prompted to Enable IR, tap
More info
to learn how to
configure your set top box to receive and respond to IR
controls.
8. Confirm you have completed the IR setup process and
programming your box.
9. If prompted, place a check mark in the
Notification Panel
field
and tap
Done
. This allows you to pin a shortcut to your remote
on the Notification Panel.
10. Press (
Back
).
269
Note:
This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time process
and once successful should not need to be repeated.
11. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the on-
screen instructions.
Using WatchON
To change channels:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
➔
(
WatchON
).
3. From the top of the main screen, tap (
Remote Control
).
This launches an on-screen set of remote control tabs. Choose
from one of the following:
•Easy remote
: provides the most common used control features. Scroll
down to view additional functions.
4. In a single motion touch and drag up from the bottom-right of
the screen to access additional remote tabs Choose from one
of the following:
•TV
: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.
• [Set top box]
: displays customized control specific to your configured
set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control functions.
5. From the remote screen press and then
tap (
Change room
) to choose from different receivers/
boxes in different rooms. Ex: Living Room box, Bedroom box,
etc.
6. Press
(
Back
) to return to the main menu.
Applications and Development 270
Locating your favorite programming:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap (
Combined View
)
to reveal available media categories.
3. Select an available category.
– or –
Tap
Channel Guide
to display on your TV an
on-screen listing of
a
vailable set top box shows.
For additio
nal information on the WatchON a
pplication,
press
and then select
Help
.
WatchOn Settings
From the main WatchON screen, press and then select
an available on-screen option:
• Change room
: allows you to select a previously configured room.
•Edit channels
: allows you to add or remove channels from your custom
list. Press and hold a channel number to update the channel entry.
• Settings
: provides access to the Samsung WatchON settings menu.
•About
: displays on-screen information about the application.
•Help
: displays on-screen help information.
271
Personalize WatchON
You can personalize your application to do things such as show
content only from your selected media categories, or add an
additional room’s set top box.
To configure your Just for you settings:
The Just for you option displays available content matching your
activated media categories. These categories can be configured
during your initial set up or at any later time.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON sc
reen, tap (
Combined View
)
Just for you
.
3. From the
On TV
tab, press
and then
select
Settings
.
4. Access paramete
rs such as
Basic profile
,
Like programs
,
Disliked programs
,
Genres
and
Sports
to then configure and
enable those parameters you would like to show in the Just for
you tab.
To add a new room:
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from several
rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box in your living
room and then move into your bedroom to do the same.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap the
On TV
tab, press
and then select
Settings
Add room
.
3. Name the new room and tap
Next
.
4. Enter your current zip code and tap
Done
. This zip code must
correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box.
Applications and Development 272
5. Follow steps 4-10 from page 267 to complete the process.
YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and
share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) ➔ (
YouTube
).
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos, scroll
down to browse through the main page thumbnails, or scroll to
the bottom to explore additional options.
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or tap the
title link.
To configure YouTube Settings:
Press and then tap
Settings
and configure the following
parameters:
• General
–
High quality on mobile
, when enabled, allows you to start all videos in
high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network.
–
Caption font size
allows you to set the closed-caption font size used by
on-screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Huge.
–
Uploads
specifies network preferences for uploads.
–
Content localization
allows you to prioritize channels and videos from a
specific country or region.
–
Improve YouTube
allows you to anonymously send YouTube information
to help improve the application.
–
New video notifications
allows you to receive notifications when new
videos are posted that meet your interest criteria.
273
• Connected TVs
–
Allows you to pair your device to a wireless TV running a YouTube
application. Options include Add a TV and Edit TVs.
•Search
–
Clear search history
allows you to clear previous YouTube searches
from showing up in the YouTube search box.
–
Never remember history
allows you to force YouTube to never store
search history information.
–
SafeSearch filtering
allows you to configure block settings for videos
containing restricted content. This option blocks these videos from
appearing within your search results. Choose from: Don’t filter or Strict.
• Preloading
–
Preload subscriptions
allows you to preload (or go get videos while on
Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.
–
Preload watch later
allows you to enable the preload function on
selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data usage
information and tap
OK
to accept the terms.
Note:
Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your device’s
storage space and may result in additional charges if your
service plan is not unlimited.
•Captions
–
Text size
allows you to assign a text size to on-screen captions.
–
Subtitle style
allows you to assign a style to on-screen subtitles.
Applications and Development 274
•About
–
Help
provides answers to most YouTube questions.
–
Feedback
allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
–
Google Mobile Terms of Service
–
YouTube Terms of Service
–
Google Mobile Privacy Policy
–
YouTube Privacy Policy
–
Open source licenses
–
App version
displays the software version for the current YouTube
application.
To watch a high quality video:
Press and then tap
Settings
➔
General
➔
High quality on
mobile
.
275
Section 9: Connections
Your device is equipped with features that allow you to quickly
connect to the Web.
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows
you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as
headsets and hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds,
computers, printers, and wireless devices. The Bluetooth
communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
➔
(
Connections
tab).
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Bluetooth
slider to the
right to turn it on.
The slider color indicates the activation status. When active,
displays in the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
➔
Connections
tab.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Bluetooth
slider to the
left to turn it off.
Note:
Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.
Connections 276
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
Bluetooth Settings
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the
characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:
•
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
•
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth
devices
•
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
Connections
tab
Bluetooth
.
2. Verify Bluetooth is active (indicated by
).
ON
ON
3. Press and tap the
Visibility timeout
, and
Received files
fields to set the options.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
More
tab
About device
.
277
3. Tap the
Device name
field and use the on-screen keyboard to
edit the current device name.
4. Tap
to erase the current device name and enter a new
name for this device using the keyboard.
5. Tap
OK
to confirm your setting.
To set visibility:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the state of
the visibility check mark. Activating this feature enabled your
device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate.
Note:
Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible
time-out field (2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Never timeout).
Press
(
Menu
)
Visibility timeout
.
This value appears as a countdown within this
Visibility timeout
field.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap
Scan
to
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
To review your Bluetooth received files:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, press
and then tap
Received files
.
Connections 278
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.
When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,
secure connections while bypassing the discovery and
authentication process.
Note:
Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process.
Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize
their partnership and exchange information without entering a
passcode.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the
Visibility
field (shown
by the device name).
Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an
external device. This is shown by a green check mark.
3. Tap
Scan
. Your device displays a list of discovered in-range
Bluetooth devices.
4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap
OK
.
6. The external device must accept the connection and enter your
device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
displays
in the Status area.
279
Note:
Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-
compatible devices, display and operations may be different,
and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible
with all Bluetooth-compatible devices.
Important!
If callers can not hear you during a call while using a
paired Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify
the
Call audio
option is enabled within the entry’s Bluetooth
Settings page.
Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings
Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than just
functioning as a headphone, but also have built in microphones for
picking up voice. Although both functions are detected by the device
and activated, there might be times when you need to change or
update these settings for Phone and Media Audio:
•
I can hear the other person but they can’t hear me...
•
I want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
(
Settings
).
3. Toggle the
Call audio
field to activate/de-activate the Bluetooth
device’s on-board microphone.
4. Toggle the
Media audio
field to activate/de-activate the
Bluetooth device’s headset functions.
Connections 280
Note:
If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired
Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify the
Call
audio
option is enabled within the entry’s Bluetooth Settings
page.
Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the
device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the pairing. At a
later point when you wish to reconnect the device, there is no need
to setup the connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired
device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap
OK
to confirm disconnection.
Note:
Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically
if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is
powered off.
Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record” and
upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the previous
pairing information.
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
(
Settings
)
Unpair
to delete the paired device.
281
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you
may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items
using a Bluetooth connection.
Note:
Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on
both your phone and the external device, and the recipient’s
device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(
Contacts
).
3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the
on-screen context menu.
4. Tap
Share via
Bluetooth
and select a paired external
Bluetooth device.
Note:
The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list.
Enable Downloading for Web Applications
Important!
Before you can download a web application you must
insert an SD into the phone and enable the
Unknown
sources
feature (enables downloading). For more
informat
ion, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card”
on page 11.
Connections 282
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
Security
Unknown sources
check box.
2. Tap
OK
to allow install of non-Play Store applications.
Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the
installation of non-Play Store applications.
Warning!
Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to
protect your phone and data, use the Play Store to install
web applications. For more information, refer to
“Downloading a New Google Application” on page 247.
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable
using various USB connection modes.
Media device (MTP)
: allows you to transfer media files in Windows, or
using an Android file transfer on a Mac.
Camera (PTP)
: allows you to transfer photos using the camera
software, and transfer any files onto a PC that does not support MTP.
Note:
To sync your device to your computer it is highly recommended
that you install Samsung Kies which is available at
http://
www.samsung.com/kies
(for Windows/Mac).
Note:
If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP
Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. Also,
ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media
Player 10 or higher installed on your computer.
283
Connecting as a Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access
the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the device, you can
also access the files directory from the memory card by using the
device as a memory card reader.
Note:
The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable
disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to
the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up window displays
on the PC when connected.
2. Open the folder to view files.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain types of
Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi communication requires
access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP).
These WAPs can either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot
Spots, or Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
Note:
For additional information on WPS Connections, refer to "WPS
Push Button" on page 294 and "WPS PIN Entry" on page 295.
Connections 284
Activating Wi-Fi
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).
Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
Connections
tab).
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Wi-Fi
slider to the right to
turn it on. The device scans for available in-range wireless
networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks on the
same screen.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
The network names and security settings (Open network or
Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in the
Wi-Fi networks section.
2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.
Note:
When you select an open network you are automatically
connected.
3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).
4. Tap
Connect
.
285
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating w
ith a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and
communicating
Manually Add a New Network Connection
1. From the Wi-Fi network screen, tap
Add Wi-Fi network
.
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access
Point).
3. Tap the
Security
field and select a security option. This must
match the current security setting on your target WAP.
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
5. Tap
Connect
to store the new information and connect to the
target WAP.
Note:
No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second
time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless
network. The WAP key is required when the device is reset
using factory default settings.
Connections 286
Deactivating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
Connections
tab.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Wi-Fi
slider to the left to
turn it off.
– or –
Activate and Deactivate Wi-Fi from the Notification bar.
Note:
Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
can reduce battery life and use times.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Wi-Fi
slider to the right to
turn it on.
3. Tap
Scan
.
287
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of
the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:
•
Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy
•
Viewing the device’s MAC Address
•
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press
and then tap
Advanced
.
Connections 288
Section 10: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the device settings for your device. It includes
such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra settings
associated with your device.
Accessing the Settings Tabs
From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
Settings
).
– or –
Press
and then tap
Settings
.
The four available tabs are then displayed. The previous
Settings list is now broken down into four available tabs
described below.
Settings Tabs - Overview
The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the Settings
screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at the top of the
screen:
Connections
:
This tab allows you to see all of settings related to the
connection of your device to external sources. Features
include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data usage, More networks
(Airplane mode, Mobile networks, and VPN), NFC,
S Beam, Nearby devices, and Screen Mirroring.
289
My device
My device
My device
:
This tab provides access to device configuration and
customization features. Features include: Lock screen,
Display, LED indicator, Sound, Home screen mode,
Call, Blocking mode, Hands-free mode, Power saving
mode, Accessory, Accessibility, Language and input,
Motions and gestures, Smart screen, and Voice control.
Accounts
:
This tab provides both the ability to create and modify
your accounts (ex: Samsung account, Email, etc.), and
access Backup and reset features.
More
:
This tab provides access to the remaining set of device
settings not listed under the other tabs. These include
Location services, Security, Application manager,
Battery, Storage, Date and time, and About device.
Note:
The settings for your device are described below using the order
in which they appear in the Settings menu. Functions found
under the Connections tab are listed first, followed by My
device, Accounts, and More tabs.
Changing Your Settings 290
Wi-Fi Settings
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings.
Activating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
Connections
tab).
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Wi-Fi
slider to the right to
turn it on . The device scans for available in-range
wireless networ
ks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks on
the same screen.
ON
ON
Wi-Fi settings
Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your device automatically uses
Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile services.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press
and then tap
Advanced
. Configure the settings as
desired.
The available Wi-F
i connection are displayed with a security type
displayed next to them.
Network Notification
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the Status
bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi network. You can
deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press
and then tap
Advanced
.
3. Tap
Network notification
. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Network notification is active.
291
4. Tap
Network notification
again to remove the check mark and
deactivate this feature.
Wi-Fi During Sleep
By default, when your device enter a sleep mode, your Wi-Fi
connection stays on all the time. If the feature is Never enabled
during sleep that current data usage is taken over by your SIM and
its network connection.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press
and then tap
Advanced
Keep Wi-Fi on during
sleep
.
3. Select an available option:
•Always
: maintains your current active Wi-Fi connection even during
sleep.
• Only when plugged in
: maintains the active Wi-Fi connection only when
the device detects it is connected to a power supply. This reduced the
drain on your device’s battery.
• Never (increase data usage)
: shuts off the current Wi-Fi connection
during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network
connection.
Changing Your Settings 292
Auto Network selection
Allows the device to automatically switch between Wi-Fi network or
cellular network.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press
and then tap
Advanced
.
3. Tap the
Auto network switch
to activate the feature that would
allow the device to connect to the best available signal
connection.
Finding your WI-Fi Address Information
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press
and then tap
Advanced
.
3. Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at the
bottom of the screen.
•MAC address
: view your device’s MAC address, required when
connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
•IP address
: view your device’s IP address.
Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
Add Wi-Fi network
.
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access
Point).
3. Tap the
Security
field and select a security option. This must
match the current security setting on your target WAP
(Wireless Access Point).
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
293
5. Tap
Connect
to store the new information and connect to the
target WAP.
Note:
An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its
purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing
your LAN — whether accidentally or intentionally. To
communicate, wireless devices must be configured with the
same SSID.
WPS Push Button
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) feature (sometimes associated with
a physical or on-screen button on most WAPs) allows you to pair
your device and WAP without the need for entering a passcode. This
process is similar to Wi-Fi Direct pairing.
In this case, once the WPS feature is active on your WAP, your device
can then detect it and then immediately pair to it.
Note:
WPS-capable routers appear in the Wi-Fi list of available
devices with the term (
WPS available
) below their name.
To pair your device using WPS:
1. Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your Wireless
Access Point.
2. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
3. Press
then tap
WPS push button
.
4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external router
now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.
Changing Your Settings 294
WPS PIN Entry
If a WPS Push Button does not work, there is an alternative WPS
connection method where you would use a device generated PIN
number to establish the connection. This number is then entered into
your WAP’s WPS client PIN field to complete the connection.
To pair your device using WPS PIN:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Wi-Fi
.
2. Press
then tap
WPS PIN entry
.
3. Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into your Wi-
Fi Router’s client PIN field.
4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external router
now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.
Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings
You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi-Fi
capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data between
devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi direct
communication. This connection is direct and not via a Hotspot or
WAP.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and
communicating.
Note:
Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi
network connection.
295
To activate your connection:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Wi-Fi
slider to the right to
turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status.
3. Tap
Wi-Fi Direct
.
4. Tap
Scan
and select the single device name to begin the
connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
– or –
Tap
Multi connect
Scan
and select all the device names to
begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible
devices.
Note:
The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and
running before it can be detected by your device.
5. Tap
Done
. The direct connection is then established. Confirm
appears in the Status bar.
6. When prompted to complete the connection, the recipient
should tap
OK
. Your status field now reads “Connected” and
your connected device is listed within the Wi-Fi Direct devices
listing.
Changing Your Settings 296
Bluetooth settings
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device
name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover
it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with which to pair.
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
Connections
tab).
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Bluetooth
slider to the
right to turn it on.
The slider color indicates the activation status. When active,
displays in the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Bluetooth
slider to the
left to turn it off.
Note:
Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.
Changing the Device Name
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
About device
.
2. Tap the
Device name
field and use the on-screen keyboard to
edit the current device name.
3. Tap to erase the current device name and enter a new
name for this device using the keyboard.
297
4. Tap
OK
to confirm your setting.
Activating Visibility
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Bluetooth
.
2. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
3. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the state of
the visibility check mark. Activating this feature enabled your
device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate.
Scanning for Devices
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you
can pair with them.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Bluetooth
.
2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap
Scan
to
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
Important!
Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN
number to confirm and pair with them.
3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and tap
OK
.
Changing Your Settings 298
Data Usage
Monitor and mange your device’s data usage capabilities.
Features include activation/deactivation or network data usage, set
mobile data usage for a set period of time, and view application data
usage.
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
Connections
tab)
Data usage
.
To activate/deactivate Mobile data usage:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Data
usage
.
2. Tap the
Mobile data
field to activate the feature. A green check
mark indicates the feature is active.
3. Tap the
Mobile data
field again to deactivate the feature.
To set a mobile data limit:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Data
usage
.
2. Place a check mark in the
Set mobile data limit
field.
3. Read the on-screen disclaimer info and tap
OK
.
4. Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange
horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning and
Maximum data limits.
5. Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time
frames.
6. Tap the
Data usage cycle
button and select either the current
cycle or define your own by selecting
Change cycle
.
299
7. Press and then select from the available on-screen
options:
• Restrict background data
prevents background data usage. This can
help prevent over usage of your data minutes.
• Auto sync data
allows the device to automatically sync information and
updates with your various services.
•Show Wi-Fi usage
activates an additional Wi-Fi tab that shows you your
Wi-Fi data usage.
More Networks
This tab displays additional wireless and network information.
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
Connections
tab)
More networks
.
Airplane Mode
This mode allows you to use many of your device’s features, such as
Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane or in any
other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited.
Important!
When your device is in Airplane mode, it cannot send or
receive any calls or access online information or
applications.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Airplane mode
slider to
the right to turn it on.
Changing Your Settings 300
3. Tap
OK
. The Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of
your screen.
Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Mobile
networks options.
From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
Mobile networks
.
The foll
owing options display:
Use mobile data
Allows you to activate mobile data usage on your device.
From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
Mobile networks
Mobile data
.
Access Point Names
To access a wireless access point:
From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
Mobile networks
Access Point Names
. A list of
the Access point names display. The active access point
displays a bright green, filled circle to the right of the name.
301
Network Operators
Using this feature you can view the current network connection. You
can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set the
network selection to Automatic.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap
Network operators
. The current network connection
displays at the bottom of the list.
3. Follow the on-screen options to make an available selection.
Important!
You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an
available network.
Default Setup Options
Your device default is set to Automatic (to automatically search for an
available network. You can set this option to Manual to select a
network each time you connect.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
Mobile networks
Network operators
.
2. Tap
Default setup
.
3. Tap
Automatic
to allow the device to automatically
select a network.
– or –
Tap
Manual
to locate and connect to a network manually.
Changing Your Settings 302
VPN
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual
Private Networks (VPNs).
Note:
Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or
password. For more information, refer to “Security” on
page 365.
Adding a VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to
use: PPTP, L2TP/IPSec PSK, L2TP/IPSec RSA, IPSec Xauth PSK,
IPSec Xauth RSA, IPSec Hybrid RSA.
Important!
Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
configure one.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
VPN
.
2. If prompted, read the screen lock information and follow the
on-screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password.
3. Tap
(
Add VPN network
).
4. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided by
your network administrator.
5. Tap
Save
.
Note:
Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types.
303
Connecting to a VPN
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
VPN
.
2. Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to.
3. Enter any requested credentials into the pop-up that opens.
4. Tap
Connect
.
Edit a VPN
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
VPN
.
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.
3. In the pop-up that opens, select
Edit network
.
4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.
5. Tap
Save
.
Delete a VPN
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
More
networks
VPN
.
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.
3. Tap
Delete network
within the pop-up that opens up.
Changing Your Settings 304
Near Field Communication
This feature is used to read and exchange tags. When used in
conjunction with Android Beam, your device can be used to beam
application content when NFC-capable devices are touched.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab.
2. Tap the
NFC
field and verify the feature is active (indicated by
).
ON
ON
Android Beam
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content to
another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos, contacts, and more.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
NFC
Android Beam
.
2. Tap the
OFF / ON
icon to turn Android Beam on.
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-capable
device and the content is transferred.
S Beam
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files
directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These
files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large
files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files
from your music player, and more.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab.
2. Verify the NFC feature is active.
3. Tap
S Beam
and make sure the feature is turned on.
305
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the
S
Beam
slider to the right to turn it on.
5. Complete the transfer process between the two
NFC-enabled devices by placing them back to back.
This feature can come in very handy to quickly share pictures
between users with compat
ible S Beam devices.
Nearby devices
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices
using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network.
2. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Nearby
devices
.
3. Tap the
File sharing
field to turn file sharing on. Once active,
(
Nearby devices
) appears at the top of the screen.
4. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap
OK
.
5. Tap
Shared contents
, then check the media you would like to
share. Tap
OK
.
6. Tap
Allowed devices list
, then select the connected devices you
would like to allow.
7. Tap
Not-allowed devices list
, then select the connected devices
you would like to not allow.
8. Tap
Download to
, then select the destination of any
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from USB storage
(Device) or SD card.
Changing Your Settings 306
9. Tap
Upload from other devices
, then select the actions you’ll
take when you upload content from other devices. Choose
from either Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject.
Screen Mirroring
With feature enabled, you can wirelessly mirror what is currently
displayed on your device’s screen with an external TV.
Note:
Screen mirroring can only be done with a compatible wireless
TV.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab
Screen
Mirroring
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Screen Mirroring
slider to
the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation
status.
307
Lock Screen
This menu contains features that allows you to configure the
device’s security parameters.
Screen Unlock Pattern Overview
To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a
screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every
time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen
automatically turns off).
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
My device
My device
(
My device
tab)
Lock screen
Screen lock
.
The Screen lock menu allow
s to choose from a variety of locking
features such as:
• Swipe
: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
• Face unlock
: Look at your phone to unlock it.
• Face and voice
: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.
• Pattern
: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create and use
to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or change your
screen unlock pattern.
• PIN
: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• Password
: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
• None
: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will never
lock.
Changing Your Settings 308
Using Swipe
This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires
that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
Swipe
.
Swipe options
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Configure one of the following options.
• Multiple widgets
allows you to display multiple widgets on your lock
screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is enabled.
• Lock screen widgets
allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed
on your home screens.
•Shortcuts
sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen.
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on.
• Unlock effect
sets the effect you receive when unlocking the phone.
You can select None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.
•Help text
shows help information on the Lock screen.
• Wake up in lock screen
requires that you say a command to wake-up
your phone.
• Set wake-up command
designates your wake-up commands. Tap
Set
wake-up command
and follow the on-screen prompts to create a new
verbal command.
309
Using Face Unlock
This feature uses facial recognition to unlock your phone. This
feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can
be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
Face unlock
.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap
Next
.
4. From the About Face Unlock screen, tap
Set it up
Continue
.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
6. If your face is not recognized, choose an unlocking method:
Pattern or PIN.
Face unlock options
Once Face unlock is enabled, additional options are available:
• Lock screen widgets
allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed
on your home screens.
• Improve facial recognition
allows you to improve your device’s face
matching capability by capturing your face in different lighting, with or
without glasses, and bearded or clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Presence check
requires that you blink when using the Face unlock
feature. This will increase the security of the feature.
• Lock automatically
locks the screen 5 seconds after the screen turns
off.
• Lock instantly with power key
once enabled, instantly locks the screen
after pressing the power key.
Changing Your Settings 310
Using Face and Voice Unlock
This feature uses facial recognition to unlock your phone. This
feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can
be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
Face and voice
.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap
Next
.
4. From the About Face Unlock screen, tap
Set it up
Continue
.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Once prompted to speak and unlock command, tap
and repeat the phrase four times.
7. Once complete, tap
Done
.
Setting an Unlock Pattern
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone.
When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will draw an
unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the
phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate the User tactile
feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the
pattern.
The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a
backup to the pattern lock. If you forget your pattern, you can regain
access to the device by entering a PIN code.
Note:
Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.
311
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
Pattern
.
3. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point. Then,
without removing your finger from the screen, drag your finger
over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point
and they are highlighted with a green circle.
4. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,
horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the screen
and tap
Continue
.
5. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping
Confirm
. The Unlock pattern is set.
6. Enter the backup PIN code and tap
Continue
.
7. Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and
tap
OK
.
Changing the Screen Lock Pattern
This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock
pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to
changing your password from time to time.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
.
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.
4. Tap
Pattern
and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous section.
Changing Your Settings 312
Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
.
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.
4. Tap
None
.
Pattern options
Once an unlock pattern is enabled, additional options are available:
• Lock screen widgets
allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed
on your home screens.
• Make pattern visible
allows you to see the pattern as you draw it.
• Lock automatically
allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
• Lock instantly with power key
allows you to lock the screen by
pressing
.
What If I Forget my Pattern?
If you forget your device's lock pattern, you can unlock your device
or reset it using your Google™ Account credentials. When you enter
the wrong unlock pattern too many times, you should see an option
at the bottom of the screen that says
Forgot pattern?
Follow these
steps to use either your PIN or email address.
Important!
You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times before
the device is locked.
313
Important!
If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock pattern or
unlocking your device, please contact your provider for
assistance.
To unlock your device with a PIN code:
1. Tap
Backup PIN
(located at the bottom of the screen).
2. Tap
Done
.
3. If you have forgotten your current pattern, tap
Pattern
from the
Screen unlock settings menu and follow the procedures
outlined in "Setting an Unlock Pattern"
on page 311 to create
a new pattern.
To unlock your device using your Google account:
1. Tap
Forgot pattern?
(located at the bottom of the screen).
2. Tap the
Username (email)
and
Password
fields, use the
on-screen keyboard to enter your Google Account credentials,
and tap
Sign in
to complete the login process.
3. If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials, visit the
Google website to recover them. If you still cannot get your
Google Account credentials, contact your wireless provider for
additional options.
PIN Lock and Unlock
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
PIN
.
3. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch
Continue
to confirm the password.
Changing Your Settings 314
4. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap
OK
to confirm.
Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order
to unlock the phone.
Password Lock and Unlock
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock
screen
.
2. Tap
Screen lock
.
3. Tap
Password
.
4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap
Continue
to
confirm the password.
5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap
OK
to confirm.
Customizing Your Lock Screen Shortcuts
Your device also provides up to 4 application shortcuts that can be
used to quickly access an application right from the lock screen.
Important!
To use these shortcuts, your Screen Lock feature can only
be set to either Swipe or None.
To open a shortcut from the lock screen:
In a single motion, swipe your finger over the on-screen icon
and towards the top of your device. Your device will unlock and
you will be taken immediately to the application.
315
To edit these Lock screen shortcuts:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Lock screen
Shortcuts
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Shortcuts
slider to the
right to turn it on.
3. Tap the
Shortcuts
field to activate the menu.
4. Tap a shortcut icon you wish to replace.
5. From the select application menu, tap a replacement
application.
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display such as
the wallpaper, Multi window, brightness, orientation, and screen
timeout, and power saving mode.
Adjusting the Screen Display
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Display
.
My device
My device
2. Configure the following screen display settings:
• Wallpaper
: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen, Lock
screen, or both.
• Notification panel
: allows you to set the brightness of your notification
panel and also select the quick setting buttons that you want to display
at the top of the notification panel (
page 42).
• Screen mode
: allows you to select from several different color modes.
• Brightness
: adjusts the on-screen brightness level. For more
information, refer to “Adjusting Screen Brightness” on page 318.
Changing Your Settings 316
• Auto rotate screen
: when enabled, the phone automatically switches
from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa. When this setting
is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode only.
•Screen timeout
: adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically
turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes,
5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
•Daydream
: allows you to control what your screen does when your
device is docked or sleeping. Tap the adjacent OFF / ON icon to turn it
on. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Font style
: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:
Default font
,
Choco cooky
,
Cool jazz
,
Rosemary
,
Samsung Sans
or
Get fonts online
. Tap
Get fonts online
to download additional fonts.
•Font size
: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
Font size
:
allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
• Touch key light duration
: allows you to adjust the delay before the
Touch key light automatically turns off.
• Show battery percentage
: to activate/deactivate the display of battery
charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen.
• Edit after screen capture
: allows you to go edit a screen immediately
after taking a screen capture.
• Auto adjust screen tone
: adjusts the phone’s LCD brightness level to
automatically adjust and conserve battery power.
317
Adjusting Screen Brightness
This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Display
Brightness
.
2. Tap
Automatic brightness
to allow the phone to self-adjust and
tap
OK
.
– or –
Touch and slide the on-screen slider to adjust the level and tap
OK
.
Assigning a Wallpaper
The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper for
your Home screen, Lock screen, or both.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Display
Wallpaper
.
2. Select an available option to change its current wallpaper.
For more in
formation, refer to “Managing Wallpapers” on page 50.
Changing Your Settings 318
LED Indicator
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn on by
default unless you turn them off.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
LED indicator
.
My device
My device
2. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on or off:
• Charging
: LED lights up when the device is connected to the charger.
• Low batt ery
: LED lights up when the battery level is low.
• Notifications
: LED lights up when you have missed calls, messages, or
application events.
• Voice recording
: LED lights up when you are recording voice. The LED
only lights up when the screen is off.
Sound Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as
configure the display settings.
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
My device
My device
(
My device
tab)
Sound
.
The follo
wing options display:
319
Silent mode via Device Options Screen
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from
making noise, in a theater for example. In
Silent Mode the speaker is
muted and the phone only vibrates
to notify you of incoming calls, or
other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an
alert.
1. Fr
om the Home screen, press and hold
(
Power/End
)
until the
Device options
screen displays.
2. Tap either
Mute
,
Vibrate
, or
Sound
from the Device options
screen to activate or deactivate these features (the current
mode displays).
Adjusting the Volume Settings
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings
within one on-screen popup menu.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Sound
Volume
.
2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume
settings for any of the following volume levels.
• Music, video, games and other media
,
Ringtone
,
Notifications
or
System
.
3. Tap
OK
to assign the volume levels.
Changing Your Settings 320
Setup the Ringtones
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Sound
.
2. Tap
Ringtones
.
3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly plays
when selected.
4. Tap
Add
to locate a compatible media file that can be used as a
ringtone.
5. Tap
OK
to assign a ringer.
Setup the Vibration
This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Sound
.
2. Tap
Vibrations
.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap
OK
.
– or –
Tap
Create
to then use an on-screen touch circle to create your
own custom vibration pattern. Tap
Save
to store the new
vibration pattern.
321
Default Notifications
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for
notifications and alarms.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Sound
.
2. Tap
Default notification sound
.
3. Select a ringtone and tap
OK
.
Setting up Vibration When Ringing
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate when a call is
incoming.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Sound
.
2. Tap the
Vibrate when ringing
field to activate the feature.
Audible System Tone Settings
These options are used when you use the dialing pad, make a screen
selection, lock your screen, or tap the screen. Each time you press a
key or make a selection the selected tone sounds.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Sound
.
2. Tap
Dialing keypad tone
to activate a tone when you use
on-screen keys. A check mark displayed next to these features
indicates active status.
3. Tap
Touch sounds
to activate a tone when you touch the
screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates
active status.
4. Tap
Screen lock sound
to activate a tone when you use the
Lock screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature
indicates active status.
Changing Your Settings 322
Adapt Sound
The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call sounds.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Sound
Adapt Sound
.
2. Read the instructions and tap
Start
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your personal call
sound.
Home Screen Mode
This application allows you to set your display to the conventional
layout of
Standard mode
or provide an easier user experience for the
first-time smartphone users using
Easy mode
.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
My device
My device
(
Home screen mode
).
2. Select one of the following options:
• Standard mode
: provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets
on your home screens.
• Easy mode
: provides easier user experience for first-time smartphone
users on the home screens.
3. Tap
Apply
and give your device a few seconds to update the
device with the new look and feel.
323
Call Settings
1. From the Home screen, tap .
2. Press
and then tap
Call settings
.
– or –
From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Call
.
My device
My device
Configuring General Call Settings
Configure the general call settings using this option.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Phone
).
2. Press
and then tap
Call settings
and then tap one of the
following options:
• Call rejection
: allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection
list.
–
Auto reject mode
: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls.
–
Auto reject list
: provides access to current rejection entries and
numbers.
• Set up call rejection messages
: allows you to manage both existing
rejection messages and create new ones.
• Answering/ending calls
: allows you to manage the settings for
answering and ending calls.
–
The home key answers calls
allows you to press to answer
the phone.
–
Voice control
allows you to answer incoming voice calls using voice.
–
The power key ends calls
allows you to press the power key to end the
current call.
Changing Your Settings 324
• Turn off screen during calls
: allows you to force the screen to turn off
during an active call.
•Call alerts
: allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts
and vibration.
–
Call vibrations
: vibrates the phone when the called party answers.
Choose from: Answer vibration or Call-end vibration.
–
Call status tones
: assigns sounds settings during the call. Choose from:
Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end tone.
–
Alerts on calls
: selects whether alarm and message notification is
turned off during a call.
• Call accessories
: allows you to assign headset settings during incoming
calls.
–
Automatic answering
configures the device to automatically answer
and incoming call when a headset is detected.
–
Automatic answering timer
configures the time delay before the
device automatically accepts the incoming call.
–
Outgoing call conditions
configures the connected Bluetooth device to
make outbound calls within one of two settings: Even when device locked
or Only when device unlocked.
• Additional settings
: allows you to configure additional call settings. For
more information, r
efer to “Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings”
on page 328.
• Ringtones and keypad tones
: allows you to manage your device’s
ringtones and vibratory features. Choose from: Ringtones, Vibrations,
Vibrate when ringing, and Dialing keypad tone
(used when the keypad is
pressed).
325
• Personalize call sound
: allows you to enable the personalize call sound
function within an active call. You can adjust the audio by enabling
selecting an audio preset.
For more information, refer to “Adjusting the
Call Volume
” on page 71.
•Noise reduction
: allows you to enable suppression of background
audio.
• Increase volume in pocket
: enables the ringtone volume to be
increased when the device is in a pocket or bag.
• Voicemail service
: allows you to assign the service.
• Voicemail settings
: displays the settings for the voicemail.
•Sound
: assigns your device’s ringtone.
•Vibrate
: configures the vibrate settings.
• TTY mode
: allows you to configure the TTY settings.
For more information, refer to “TTY Mode” on page 334.
• Hearing aids
: allows you to enable/disable hearing aid compatibility. For
more inform
ation, refer to “Hearing Aids” on page 334.
Call rejection
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Call rejection
Auto
reject mode
and tap one of the following options:
• All numbers
: to reject all calls.
• Auto reject numbers
: to reject all calls in your Reject list.
2. Tap
Auto reject list
.
3. Tap
to manually add numbers to the Reject list.
4. Tap
Unknown
to create a check mark and automatically reject
all calls that are not in your Contacts list.
Changing Your Settings 326
Set reject messages
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Set up call rejection
messages
.
2. Tap
to manually add a reject message.
– or –
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed when you
want the call to be rejected. You can edit the message if
desired.
3. Tap
Save
to save the reject message.
Answering/ending calls
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Answering/ending calls
.
2. Select any of the following options:
• The home key answers calls
allows you to press to answer
the phone.
•Voice control
allows you to answer incoming voice calls using voice.
• The power key ends calls
allows you to press the power key to end the
current call.
Turn off screen during calls
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that your
phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.
From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Turn off screen during
calls
to create a check mark and enable the feature.
327
Call alerts
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Call alerts
.
2. Tap
Call vibrations
to enable your phone to vibrate when the
called party answers the phone.
–
Choose from: Answer vibration or Call-end vibration.
3. Tap
Call status tones
to set the sound settings during a call
then tap
OK
.
–
Choose from: Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end tone.
4. Tap
Alerts on calls
to turn off alarm and message notifications
during a call.
Accessory settings for call
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Call accessories
.
2. The following options are available:
• Automatic answering
: configures the device to automatically answer
and incoming call when a headset is detected.
• Automatic answering timer
: configures the time delay before the
device automatically accepts the incoming call.
• Outgoing call conditions
: allows you to make calls even when the
device is locked.
Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional settings
.
2. Tap one of the following options:
•Caller ID
: chooses whether your number is displayed when someone
answers your outgoing call. Choose from: Network default, Hide number,
or Show number.
Changing Your Settings 328
• Call forwarding
: configures the forwarding settings. For more
information, refer to “Configuring Call Forwarding” on page 329.
• Auto area code
: allows you to automatically prepend a specific area
code to all outbound calls.
• Call waiting
: notifies you of an incoming call while you are on another
call.
• Auto redial
: automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to
connect or the call is cut off.
• Fixed dialing numbers
: manages fixed dialing numbers. See
description below.
Configuring Call Forwarding
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional settings
Call forwarding
.
2. Tap an available option:
• Forward when busy
: forwards all your calls to voicemail when your
phone is busy.
Using Auto Area Code
This feature prepends an area code to all outbound calls. When
enabled, the designated prefix is always added before your dialed
numbers.
Ex: If you were using 999 as your area code, 555-5555 would be
dialed as 999 - 555-5555.
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional settings
.
2. Tap
Auto area code
, enter a new prefix, and then tap
OK
.
329
Call Waiting
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional settings
.
2. Tap
Call waiting
to enable/disable the on-screen notification of
new incoming call during an active call.
Auto Redial
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional settings
.
2. Tap
Auto redial
to automatically enable/disable the feature
whereby the device redials the dialed number if it is unable to
connect or the call is cut off.
Fixed Dialing Numbers
Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a
limited set of phone numbers.
Enabling FDN
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional
settings
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
Turn on FDN
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap
OK
.
Important!
Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does
not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your provider. Entering an
incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact
customer service for assistance.
Changing Your Settings 330
Changing the PIN2 Code
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional
settings
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
Change PIN2
.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
Important!
Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does
not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your provider. Entering the
PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock.
Contact customer service for assistance.
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone
numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Additional
settings
Fixed dialing numbers
.
2. Tap
Turn on FDN
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap
OK
.
FDN is enabled.
4. Tap
FDN list
then press and then tap
Add contact
or edit
the contacts that were stored.
331
Important!
Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does
not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your provider. Entering the
PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock.
Contact customer service for assistance.
Ringtones and keypad tones
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Ringtones and keypad
tones
.
2. Tap
Ringtones
, select a ringtone, and tap
OK
.
•
Tap
Add
to locate an audio file to create as a ringtone.
3. Tap
Vibrations
, select a vibration type, and tap
OK
.
•
Tap
Create
to begin creating your own custom vibration.
4. Tap
Vibrate when ringing
to create a check mark if you want
your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.
5. Tap
Keypad tones
to create a check mark if you want tones to
play when the keypad is pressed.
Personalize call sound
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a
call with and without earphones.
From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Personalize call sound
and activate the feature by selecting an available option.
For more information, refer to “Personalizing the Call Sound Setting”
on page 72.
Changing Your Settings 332
Noise reduction
This option allows you to suppress background noise during a call.
From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Noise reduction
to create
a check mark and enable the feature.
Increase volume in pocket
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a
pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its location.
From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Increase volume in
pocket
to create a check mark and enable the feature.
Voicemail
You can view your voicemail number from this menu.
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Voicemail service
.
2. If an additional voicemail service is in use (other than
provider), tap
Voice settings
to now view your selected
voicemail number and information.
Sound - Voicemail Ringtone
This option allows you to assign your default voicemail notification
tone.
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Sound
.
2. Select a voicemail notification tone and tap
OK
.
Vibrate
This option allows you to activate a vibration for an incoming
voicemail.
From the main
Call settings
page, tap
Vibrate
field to toggle the
feature on or off.
333
TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to
communicate by telephone.
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with
the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible
with digital cell phones.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs
into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not provided with
your TTY device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase
the connector cable.
1. From the main
Call settings
page, tap
TTY mode
.
2. Tap
TTY Full
,
TTY HCO
, or
TTY VCO
to activate the feature, or
TTY Off
to deactivate the feature. Off is the default setting.
Hearing Aids
This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid Compatibility
for this device.
From the main
Call settings
page, tap the
Hearing aids
field to
activate the feature (green check mark), or tap it again to
deactivate the feature. Off is the default setting.
Changing Your Settings 334
Blocking Mode
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected features
will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of incoming calls
from people on your allowed list.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab).
My device
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Blocking mode
slider to
the right to turn it on.
Confirm the Blocking mode active icon
appears in the
Status bar.
3. Place a green check mark adjacent to those features you
would like to enable. Choose from: Block incoming calls, Turn
off notifications, Turn off alarm and timer, Turn off LED
indicator.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active. Remove
the check mark from the
Always
field to configure the
From
and
To
time fields.
5. Tap
Allowed contacts
to assign those contacts that are
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All contacts,
Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will then appear in the
Allowed contact list
.
335
Hands-free Mode
When enabled, alarm and information will be read aloud.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Hands-free mode
.
My device
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Hands-Free mode
slider
to the right to turn it on.
Confirm the Hands-Free mode active icon appears in the
Status bar.
3. Enable any of the following options:
• Incoming call
: read out callers’ information when receiving incoming
calls.
• Message
: read out senders’ information when receiving incoming calls.
• Alarm
: read out alarm information when alarms sound.
• Schedule
: read out scheduled alarm information when alarms sound.
Power Saving Mode
This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a
power saving mode and configure additional power saving options
manually, all in an effort to conserve battery power.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Power saving mode
.
My device
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn
it on.
3. Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve
power:
• CPU power saving
: allows you to limit the maximum performance of the
CPU.
Changing Your Settings 336
• Screen power saving
: allows you to lower the screen power level.
4. Tap
Learn about Power saving
to learn about various ways to
conserve battery power.
Accessory
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when using a
car or desk dock.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Accessory
.
My device
My device
2. Tap
Dock sound
to play sounds when inserting or removing the
phone from the dock.
3. Tap
Audio output mode
to use the external dock speakers when
the phone is docked.
4. Tap
Desk home screen display
if you wish to show the desk
home screen when the device is docked.
5. Tap
Automatic unlock
if you are using a phone cover and you
want your phone to unlock when you open the cover.
Accessibility Settings
This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility
applications that aid in navigating your Android device, such as
TalkBack (uses synthesized speech to describe the results of
actions), KickBack (provides haptic feedback for actions), and
SoundBack (plays sounds for various actions). Also lets you enable
use of the power key to end calls.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Accessibility
.
My device
My device
337
Note:
Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility
applications from the Play Store.
2. Select the
Auto rotate screen
field to activate this feature which
automatically rotates an available screen.
3. Tap
Screen timeout
to timeout the accessibility feature after a
defined amount of time.
4. Tap
Lock automatically
to lock the screen automatically after a
selected amount of time.
Note:
The Lock automatically function is only available if your device
is already using the screen lock feature.
5. Select the
Speak passwords
field to activate this feature which
reads out password information.
6. Select
Answering/ending calls
field to select the methods you
can use to answer and end a call.
7. Tap
Show shortcut
allows you to press and hold
(
Power/End
) to use the accessibility shortcut under the Device
options screen.
8. Tap
Manage accessibility
to save and update your accessibility
settings or share them with another device. You can export
your settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file
with another device.
9. Tap
TalkBack
to activate the feature.
Changing Your Settings 338
Note:
TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback to help
blind and low-vision users.
Important!
TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter, except
passwords, including personal data and credit card
numbers. It may also log your user interface interactions
with the device.
10. Tap the
Font size
field to change the size of the fonts used on
the device within menus, options, etc..
Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.
11. Enable
Magnification gestures
to use exaggerated gestures
such as triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two
fingers across the screen.
12. Tap the
Negative colors
field to reverse the display of
on-screen colors from White text on a Black background to
Black text on a White background.
13. Select
Color adjustment
to allow you to adjust the display
colors if you are color blind and have difficulty reading the
display because of the colors. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions.
14. Tap
Accessibility shortcut
to allow you to quickly enable
accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide the
slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
339
15. Tap the
Text-to-speech options
field to configure the text to
speech configuration parameters.
16. Tap the
Enhance web accessibility
field to allow apps to install
scripts from Google that make their Web content more
accessible.
17. Use the
Sound balance
field to allow you to use the slider to set
the Left and Right balance when using a stereo device.
18. Tap the
Mono audio
field to enable stereo audio to be
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a
single earbud/earphone.
19. Tap the
Turn off all sounds
field to mute every sound made by
the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc..
20. Tap the
Hearing aids
field to improve the sound quality of your
device for use with hearing aids.
21. Tap
Flash notification
to allows you to set your camera light to
blink whenever you receive a notification.
22. Enable the
Assistant menu
to allow you to improve the device
accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide
the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
23. Tap the
Tap and hold delay
field to select a time interval for this
action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.
24. Enable
Interaction control
to allows you to enable or disable
motions and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the
screen from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Changing Your Settings 340
Language and Input Settings
This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display
the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Language and input
.
My device
My device
Language Settings
To set the language that the menus display on the phone:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
Language
.
2. Select a language and region from the list.
Choose Input Method
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
Default
.
2. Select an input method.
– or –
Tap
Set up input methods
to alter/modify the available input
methods.
Samsung Keyboard Settings
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
(adjacent to the
Samsung keyboard
field).
– or –
From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold
(
Input Methods
), drag across the icons, and select
(
Settings
) to reveal the
Samsung keyboard settings
screen.
341
2. Set any of the following options:
• Alphabets
sets the appearance of an alphabetic keyboard. Choose from
Qwerty keyboard or 3x4 keyboard.
• Numbers and symbols
sets the appearance of an numbers and
symbols keyboard. Choose from Qwerty keyboard or 3x4 keyboard.
• Input languages
sets the input language. Tap a language from the
available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.
•Predictive text
enables predictive text entry mode. This must be
enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and hold to
access the advanced settings.
• Continuous input
like using Swipe, allows you to enter text by sliding
your fingers across the on-screen keyboard. This feature is optimized for
use with the on-screen QWERTY keyboard.
• Cursor control
when enabled, allows you to control your on-screen
cursor by moving your finger across the keyboard.
•Key-tap sound
enables auditory feedback when you tap an on-screen
key.
• Advanced
provides access to additional settings.
–
Auto capitalization
automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first
word in each sentence (standard English style).
–
Auto spacing
automatically inserts space between words.
–
Auto punctuate
automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping
the space bar twice when using the on-screen QWERTY keyboard.
–
Character preview
provides an automatic preview of the current
character selection within the text string. This is helpful when multiple
characters are available within one key.
Changing Your Settings 342
•Tutorial
launches a brief on-screen help tutorial covering the main
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.
• Reset settings
resets the keyboard settings back to their original
configuration.
Predictive Text - Advanced Settings
The predictive text system provides next-letter prediction and
regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing the
wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.
Note:
Only available when ABC mode is selected. Predictive text
advanced settings are available only if the Predictive function is
enabled.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
(adjacent to the
Samsung keyboard
field).
– or –
From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold
(
Input Methods
) to reveal the
Samsung keyboard
settings
screen.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Predictive text
slider to
the right to turn it on.
3. Tap the
Predictive text
field and configure any of the following
advanced options:
• Personalized data
activate this feature to use the personal language
data that you have entered and selected to make your text entry
prediction results better. By enabling this feature you can choose from
the following personalization features:
343
• Learn from Facebook
allows you to log into your current Facebook
account and add used text to your personal dictionary.
• Learn from Gmail
: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account
from where your style and existing contact information is added to your
personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.
• Learn from Twitter
allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account
and add used text to your personal dictionary.
• Learn from Messages
allows your device to learn your messaging style
by using your Messaging information.
• Learn from Contacts
updates predictive style by learning your Contacts
style.
• Clear remote data
allows you to delete your anonymous data stored on
the personalization server.
• Clear personal data
removes all personalized data entered by the user.
• Privacy Policy
displays on-screen privacy information.
4. Press to return to the previous screen.
Swype Settings
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
(adjacent to the
Swype
field).
2. Tap
Settings
on the left side of the screen to alter these
settings:
• Sound on keypress
: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Pop-up on keypress
: displays the character above the key when typing.
Changing Your Settings 344
• Long-press delay
: sets the amount of time needed to select alternate
characters. Adjust the time value of the slider (in ms) and tap
OK
.
• Show complete trace
: once enabled, sets whether or not to display the
complete Swype path.
• Auto-capitalization
: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
sentence.
•Auto-spacing
: automatically inserts a space between words. When you
finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word.
• Next word prediction
: once enabled, predicts the next word in your text
string based on your current text entries.
•Show Voice key
: once enabled, displays the Voice icon on your Swype
keyboard so you can use the Voice input option.
3. Tap
Themes
on the left side of the screen to access the
following options:
• Landscape keyboard
: assigns the appearance of the landscape
keyboard. Choose from: Full screen, Mini left, Mini right, or Split.
• Keyboard height
: assigns a user-defined keyboard height for both the
Portrait and Landscape keyboard appearance. Move the slider across
the screen and tap
OK
.
• Word choice list font size
: allows you to change the font size for text
used in the word choice list. Move the slider across the screen and tap
OK
.
345
4. Tap
My Words
on the left side of the screen to access the
following options:
• Backup & Sync
: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary and sync
your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.
• Living Language
: when enabled, this feature automatically updates
your Swype dictionary with popular new words.
• Social integration
: allows you to learn information from your Facebook,
Twitter, and Gmail accounts to help you while using Swype.
• Edit my dictionary
: allows you to edit your personal Swype dictionary.
• Clear language data
: deletes all of your personal language data,
including your words.
• Contribute usage data
: when enabled, allows the Nuance
®
application
to collect usage data for better word predictions.
•Cellular data
: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by the Swype
application so it can receive program updates, language downloads, and
other related features via your existing data connection.
5. Tap
Languages
on the left side of the screen to activate and
select the current text input language. Default language is
English. Touch
Download languages
, to download additional
languages.
6. Tap
Gestures
on the left side of the screen to view helpful
information on using gestures while using Swype.
7. Tap
Help
on the left side of the screen to see the following
options:
•How to Swype
: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.
Changing Your Settings 346
• Show helpful tips
: once enabled, displays helpful tips and hints as you
are using Swype.
•Version
: displays the software version information.
8. Tap
Updates
on the left side of the screen to download any new
Swype updates. If an update is available, it will display under
the updates heading. If no updates are displayed, then check
back later to see any available updates.
Configure Google Voice Typing
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
.
– or –
From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen, then select (
Select input method
)
Set up input
methods
.
2. Tap
(adjacent to the
Google voice typing
field).
3. Select a language by tapping
Choose input languages
area.
4. Remove the check mark from the
Automatic
field. This allows
you to select additional languages.
5. Select the desired languages.
6. Activate
Block offensive words
to block recognition of known
offensive words or language. (A blue check mark indicates the
feature is active).
347
7. Tap
Offline speech recognition
to enable speech recognition via
locally stored files so that even if you are not connected to a
network you can still use the service.
Configuring Voice Input Recognition
This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input.
2. Tap
Voice search
to configure the following:
• Language
: choose a language for your voice input.
• Speech output
: Sets whether you will use speech output always or only
when using hands-free.
• Block offensive words
: enable or disable blocking of recognized
offensive words from the results of your voice-input Google searches.
• Hotword detection
: enable to being able to launch voice search by
saying the word “Google”.
• Offline speech recognition
: enables voice input while offline.
• Bluetooth headset
: records audio through a connected Bluetooth
headset.
3. Press to return to the previous screen.
Changing Your Settings 348
Configuring Text-to-speech
This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of
on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller information.
This action is called TTS (Text To Speech).
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
Text-to-speech options
.
2. Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available
options. Select
Samsung text-to-speech engine
or
Google Text-
to-speech Engine
. The default is Google Text-to-speech.
3. Tap
next to the preferred TTS engine configure the
following settings:
• Language
: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine
: allows you to view Open
Source Licenses.
• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine
: allows you to configure
the General settings for the Samsung TTS.
• Install voice data
: allows you to install voice data for speech synthesis.
4. Configure the General options to alter the settings associated
with this feature:
• Speech rate
: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by the
device.
• Listen to an example
: plays a short example of what the text-to-speech
feature sounds like on your device when activated.
349
Configuring the Mouse-TrackPad
This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for a
connected mouse or trackpad.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Language
and input
Pointer speed
.
2. Adjust the slider and tap
OK
.
Motions and Gestures Settings
This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone
actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope.
Caution!
Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results. To learn how to properly control motions,
tap
(
Apps
)
Settings
My device
tab
Motions and
gestures
. When tapped, each entry comes with an on-screen
tutorial.
•Motion
: allows you to control your device using natural movements (on
the screen).
• Palm motion
: allows you to control your device by touching the screen
with your entire hand.
• Gyroscope calibration
: calibrate your device by using the built-in
gyroscope.
Changing Your Settings 350
To activate Motion:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Motions and
gestures
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Motion
slider to the right
to turn it on.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap
OK
.
Note:
At least one feature must be activated before Motion can be
activated.
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to the on
position.
The following is a description some of the most commonly
used motion gestures:
•
Direct call
: once enabled, the device will dial the currently displayed on-
screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear.
•
Smart alert
: once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and notified of
you have missed any calls or messages.
•
Zoom
: once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can be
zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the display then
tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.
•
Move an icon
: once enabled, to move an icon to another page.
•
Browse an image
: once enabled, touch and hold a desired on-screen
image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up
and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen image.
351
•
Mute/pause
: once enabled, mute incoming calls and any playing sounds
by turning the device display down on a surface. This is the opposite of the
Pickup to be Notified Gesture.
To activate Palm Motion:
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Motions and
gestures
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the
Palm motion
slider to the
right to turn it on.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap
OK
.
Note:
At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can
be activated.
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to the on
position.
Gyroscope Calibration
Calibrate your device by using the built-in gyroscope.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Motions and gestures
Gyroscope
calibration
.
My device
My device
2. Place the device on a level surface and tap
Calibrate
. The
device adjusts the level of the accelerometer.
Note:
During the calibration process a green circle appears on-screen
and the center circle adjusts to the center position.
Changing Your Settings 352
Smart screen
The Smart screen options allow you to customize your screen
settings to make the screen more responsive and easier to use.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
My device
tab)
Smart screen
.
My device
My device
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark and
activate the features:
• Smart stay
: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects that your
face is watching the screen.
Voice control
The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice commands to
control your device.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
My device
tab
Voice
control
.
2. Verify the feature is active by tapping
ON
ON
at the top of
your screen to activate Voice control.
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to create a
checkmark and activate the feature.
• Incomi ng call s
: allows you to answer or reject calls using the
commands
Answer
and
Reject
.
• Alarm
: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the commands
Stop
and
Snooze
.
• Camera
: allows you to take pictures using the voice commands
Smile
,
Cheese
,
Capture
, or
Shoot
.
353
•Music
: allows you to control your Music player using the voice
commands
Next
,
Previous
,
Pause
,
Play
,
Volume Up
, and
Volume
Down
.
Note:
If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration, voice
control will not be available.
Add Account
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize accounts,
including your Google and email accounts.
Adding an Account
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
Accounts
tab).
2. Navigate to the
My accounts
area and then tap
Add account
and select one of the account types.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
4. A green circle will appear next to the account type once you
have created an account. Your email account will also be
displayed in the
Accounts
section of the main Settings menu.
Changing Your Settings 354
Removing an Account
Important!
Removing an account also deletes all of its messages,
contacts, and other data from the device.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Accounts
tab.
2. Navigate to the
My accounts
area and then tap the account
name.
3. From the Accounts area of the screen, tap the account entry.
4. Tap
Remove account
, then tap
Remove account
at the prompt to
remove the account and delete all its messages, contacts, and
other data.
Synchronizing a Accounts
By default, all managed accounts are synchronized. You can also
manually sync all current accounts.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Accounts
tab.
2. Navigate to the
My accounts
area and then tap the account
name.
3. Tap the account name entry.
4. Tap
Sync now
to synchronize your account or tap
Sync all
to
synchronize all your accounts. Tap
Cancel sync
to stop the
synchronization.
5. Tap
Settings
to access your account settings.
355
Creating a Samsung Account
Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to
help provide access to Play Store, etc.. An active Samsung account
is required to begin accessing applications.
Note:
The Samsung account application will manage your access to
the previously mentioned applications, and there is no longer a
need to remember different passwords for each application.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Accounts
tab.
2. Navigate to the
My accounts
area and then tap
Add account
Samsung account
.
3. If you have previously created a Samsung account, tap
Sign in
.
– or –
If this is your first time, tap
Create new account
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note:
You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via email.
5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to verify your
account via the provided email address.
Note:
Without confirming your email address and following the
documented procedures, related applications will not function
properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their
username and password access.
Changing Your Settings 356
From the Home screen, press
Backup and Reset
Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to erase
all personal data.
and then tap
Settings
(
Accounts
tab)
Backup and reset
.
Mobile Backup and Restore
The device can be configured to back up your current settings,
application data and settings.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Accounts
tab
Backup and
reset
.
2. Tap
Back up my data
to create a backup of your current phone
settings and applications.
3. Tap
Backup account
to assign the account being backed up.
4. Tap
Automatic restore
to assist in the re-installation of a
previously installed application (including preferences and
data).
5. Tap
Factory data reset
to reset your device and sound settings
to the factory default settings.
357
Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset
Backing Up Your Contacts using an SD card
Before initiating a factory reset, it is recommended that you backup
your personal data prior to use.
Important!
If you choose to back up contacts to your SIM card, all
information other than name and number is lost.
Therefore, it is recommended that you back up contacts to
your SD card.
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Contacts
).
2. Press
and then tap
Import/Export
.
3. Tap
Export to SD card
OK
. The contacts will be stored in a
.vcf file on your SD card.
To copy contacts from an SD card back to your device:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Contacts
).
2. Press
and then tap
Import/Export
Import from USB
storage
.
3. At the Save contact to prompt, tap
Device
. The contacts on the
SD card are copied to your phone.
Changing Your Settings 358
Backing Up Media to your PC
You can back up your pictures, videos, documents, and other media
to your PC. You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk
and copy files back and forth between your phone and PC. If you
insert an SD card in the device, you can also access the files
directory from the SD card by using your device as a memory card
reader.
1. Connect the USB cable to your device, then connect the cable
to your PC USB port. After a few seconds, a pop-up window
displays on the PC when it is connected with your device.
2. On the PC pop-up, click
Open device
to view files.
3. Verify your device appears as a removable disk on your PC.
Once connected, you can access the Phone folder (internal
phone memory) and the Card folder (SD card).
4. Select the location where the files are that you would like to
copy to your PC (Device or Card).
5. Select the folders where the information is kept. This would
include folders such as DCIM (camera pictures and videos),
Pictures, Music, Playlists, Download, etc.
6. Select the files that you want to copy and copy them (Control C
- copy) to a folder on your PC (Control V - paste).
7. Disconnect the USB cable from your phone and the PC.
8. To copy files on your PC back to your phone, simply reverse the
procedure.
359
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Gallery
).
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.
3. Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD
card prior to initiating the process.
Backing Up Media to your SD card
You can back up your pictures, videos, documents, and other media
to your SD card.
1. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
) (
My Files
).
2. Select the folder where the files are that you would like to copy
to the SD card. This would include folders such as DCIM
(camera pictures and videos), Pictures, Music, Playlists,
Download, etc. For example, tap (
Apps
)
(
My Files
)
Images
Camera
.
3. Tap the files that you want to copy to create a checkmark in
the box next to the filename.
4. Tap the options icon in the top right corner of the display.
5. Select
Copy
SD memory card
.
6. Go to the folder on your SD card where you would like to copy
to files to. For example, Pictures.
7. Tap
Paste here
in the top right corner of the display.
8. The files are copied to the folder.
Changing Your Settings 360
Backing Up Internet Bookmarks to your Samsung
Account
You can back up your Internet bookmarks by using your Samsung
account. Only bookmarks you have added (non-default) can be
backed up.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Accounts
tab.
2. Navigate to the
My accounts
area and then tap
Add account
and select
Samsung account
.
3. Sign in to your Samsung account or tap
Create new account
if
you don't have one yet. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. From the Home screen, tap (
Apps
)
(
Internet
).
5. From the webpage, tap (
Bookmarks
).
6. Press and then tap
Move to folder
.
7. Place a checkmark on those Bookmarks you
want to back up,
then tap
Done
.
8. Select a location or folder. The Bookmarks that you moved are
now listed under the Samsung account heading in your
Bookmark list.
9. When you get a new phone, update your software, or reset
your device, sign in to your Samsung account and the backed
up bookmarks will be displayed on your Bookmarks page
under the Samsung account heading.
361
Backing Up Settings to Google
You can use your Google account to back up apps, Wi-Fi passwords,
and other data.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Apps
) (
Gmail
).
2. Tap
Existing
if you have a Google account.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
– or –
Tap
New
if you do not have a Google account.
3. Confirm that immediately after signing in to your Google
account, the Google services screen is displayed.
4. From within the Google services screen, tap the checkbox
within the
Backup
area.
5. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
Accounts
tab)
Backup and reset
.
6. Tap
Back up my data
to create a checkmark. This will back up
your app data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other settings.
7. Your Google account should be listed under the
Backup account
option. If not, Tap
Backup account
Add account
and sign into
your Google account.
8. Tap the checkbox next to
Automatic restore
to create a
checkmark. This will restore the settings that were backed up
when you re-install an application.
Changing Your Settings 362
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings to the
factory default settings.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Accounts
tab
Backup and
reset
Factory data reset.
2. Read the on-screen reset information.
3. Tap
Reset device.
4. If necessary, enter your password and tap
Delete all
.
The device resets to the factory default settings automatically
and when finished displays the Home screen.
Location Services
The Location services allows you to configure the device’s location
services.
Important!
The more location determining functions are enabled, the
more accurate the determination will be of your position.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
Location services
.
2. Tap any of the follo
wing options to create a checkmark and
activate the service:
• Access to my location
: allows apps that have asked your permission to
use your location information. Tap the ON/OFF slider to turn it on.
• Use GPS satellites
: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your
location.
363
• Use wireless networks
: allows applications to use data from mobile
networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.
• My places
: allows you to add location information for your Home, Office,
and Car.
Enabling the GPS Satellites
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Location
services
.
2. Tap
Use GPS satellites
to enable the GPS satellite.
Using Wireless Networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use
wireless networks option.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Location
services
.
2. Tap
Use wireless networks
to allow apps to use data from
sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better
approximation of your current location.
Enabling My Places
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Location
services
.
2. Tap
My places
to enable the storage of your favorite locations.
Changing Your Settings 364
Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for
your device.
Encrypt Device
When enabled, this feature requires a numeric PIN or password to
decrypt your device each time you power it on or encrypt the data on
your SD card each time it is connected:
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
Security
.
2. Tap
Encrypt device
. For more information, read the displayed
help screen.
3. Tap
Encrypt external SD card
to enable the encryption on SD
card data that requires a password be entered each time the
microSD card is connected.
Tip:
Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
Encryption may take an hour or more.
Setting up SIM Card Lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make unauthorized
calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by
protecting the information using a PIN code.
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each time you
use the phone. Using this option you can also change your SIM PIN
number.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Security
.
2. Tap
Set up SIM card lock
.
365
3. Tap
Lock SIM card
, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap
OK
.
Note:
You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your
SIM PIN code.
To change an existing SIM Card PIN:
1. Tap
Change SIM PIN
.
2. Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
3. Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
4. Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap
OK
.
Password Settings
When you create a phone password you can also configure the
phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an
asterisk (*).
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Security
.
2. Tap
Make passwords visible
to activate this feature.
Device Administration
Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a
way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This would be
beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen. The phone
could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through administration) from
a remote location.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Security
.
2. Tap
Device administrators
to begin configuring this setting.
3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.
Changing Your Settings 366
Unknown Sources
Before you can download a web application you must enable the
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can
use this option to install non-Play Store applications.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Security
.
2. Tap
Unknown sources
to active this feature.
Verify Apps
Allows you to block or warn yourself before installing apps that can
cause harm.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Security
.
2. Tap
Verify apps
to active this feature.
Note:
Enabling this feature can prevent installation of some
applications from the Play Store.
Security Update Service
These options allow you to configure the way in which the device
checks for changes in available security policies and the method
used for the update.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Security
.
2. Tap
Security policy updates
to automatically check for changes
to the security policy and then download any updates
automatically in order to improve security and service.
3. Tap
Send security reports
to only send security reports to
Samsung once the device is connected to an active Wi-Fi
network.
367
Credential Storage
This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates
and other credentials. Certificates and credentials can be installed to
the SD card and password protected.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Security
.
2. Tap
Trusted credentials
to display only trusted CA certificates. A
check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure
credentials.
3. Tap
Install from device storage
to install encrypted certificates
from the USB Storage location.
4. Tap
Clear credentials
to clear the device (SD card or phone
memory) of all certificate contents and reset the credentials
password.
Application Manager
This device can be used for Android development. You can write
applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run the
applications using the hardware, system, and network. This feature
allows you to configure the device for development.
Warning!
Because the device can be configured with system software
not provided by or supported by Google or any other
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
This menu allows you to manage installed applications. You can view
and control currently running services, or use the device for
application development.
Changing Your Settings 368
You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well
as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications
on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.
From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
Application manager
ALL
.
Clearing Application Cache and Data
Important!
You must have downloaded applications installed to use
this feature.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Application
manager
.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3. Tap
Force stop
,
Turn off, Clear data
,
Clear cache
, or
Clear
defaults
.
Uninstalling Third-party Applications
Important!
You must have downloaded applications installed to use
this feature.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Application
manager
.
2. Tap the
DOWNLOADED
tab and select your desired application.
3. Tap
Uninstall
(from within the top area of the Application info
page).
4. At the prompt, tap
OK
to uninstall the application.
5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap
OK
.
369
Memory Usage
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
applications.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Applications
manager
.
2. Tap
DOWNLOADED
,
SD CARD
,
RUNNING
, or
ALL
to display
memory usage for that category of applications. The graph at
the bottom of each tabs (DOWNLOADED, SD CARD, RUNNING,
ALL) show used and free device memory.
Downloaded
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Applications
manager
.
2. Tap the
DOWNLOADED
tab to view a list of all the downloaded
applications on your device.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the Downloaded
tabs, press
and select
Sort by size
or
Sort by name
.
4. Tap an application to view and update information about the
application, including memory usage, default settings, and
permissions.
5. Press
and select
Reset app preferences
to reset the
default applciation used. For more information, refer to “Reset
App Preferences” on page 372.
Changing Your Settings 370
Running Services
The Running services option allows you to view and control currently
running services such as Backup, Google Talk, SMS (messaging),
Swype, and more.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Application
manager
.
2. Tap the
RUNNING
tab to view all currently active and running
applications. This tab also shows the total RAM being used by
these currently active applications.
3. Tap a process and select
Stop
to end the process and stop it
from running. When you stop the process the service or
application will no longer run until you start the process or
application again.
4. Tap
Show cached processes
to view additional cached
applications.
Important!
Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences
on the application.
Storage Used
This option allows you to view a list (on the current tab) of current
applications as sorted by size.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Application
manager
.
2. Tap the
ALL
tab to display all available applications.
3. Press
and then tap
Sort by size
to change the current list
to show items based on the amount of storage they occupy.
371
Reset App Preferences
This feature provides you with the ability to reset all preferences for
the following features: Disabled apps, Disabled app notifications,
Default applications for actions, and Background data restrictions.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Applications
manager
.
2. Tap the
ALL
tab to display all available applications.
3. Press
and then tap
Reset app preferences
Reset apps
.
Important!
As an example, if you assigned your browser to always
launch YouTube links and want that changed, you must
reset the default actions.
Battery Usage
This option allows you to view a list of those components using
battery power. The amount of time the battery was used also
displays. Battery usage displays in percentages per application.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
Battery
. The battery level displays in
percentage.
2. From the upper-right tap
(
Refresh
) to update the list.
– or –
Tap an entry to view more detailed information.
Note:
Other applications may be running that affect battery use.
Changing Your Settings 372
SD Card & Device Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory
card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
Storage
.
The available memory displays under the Total space and SD
card headings.
Important! DO NOT
remove a microSD card while the device is
accessing or transferring files. Doing so will result in loss
or damage of data. Make sure your battery is fully charged
before using the microSD card. Your data may become
damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using
the microSD card.
Mounting the SD Card
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must
mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card
establishes a USB connection with your computer.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Storage
.
2. Tap
Mount SD card
.
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD
card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Storage
.
2. Tap
Unmount SD card
OK
.
373
3. After the “
SD card will be unmounted
” message displays and
the
Mount SD card
now appears in the menu list, remove the
SD card.
Erasing Files from the SD card
To erase files from the SD card using the device:
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted.
2. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab
Storage
Mount SD card
.
3. Tap
Format SD card
Format SD card
Delete all
to format
the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all the data
stored on it.
Date and Time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
Date and time
.
2. Tap
Automatic date and time
to allow the network set the date
and time.
Important!
Deactivate
Automatic date and time
to manually set the rest
of the options.
3. Tap
Set date
and use the arrow icons to set the
Month
,
Day
, and
Year
then tap
Set
.
4. Tap
Set time
and use the arrow icons, set
Hour
, and
Minute
. Tap
PM
or
AM
, then tap
Set
.
Changing Your Settings 374
5. Tap
Automatic time zone
to allow the network set the time zone
information automatically.
6. Tap
Select time zone
, then tap a time zone.
7. Tap
Use 24-hour format
. If this is not selected the device
automatically uses a 12-hour format.
8. Tap
Select date format
and select the date format type.
About Device
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial information,
and other phone information.
To access phone information:
From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
About device
. The following information
displays:
• Software update
: allows you to connect to the network and upload any
new phone software directly to your device. The device automatically
updates with the latest available software when you access this option.
• Status
: displays the battery status, the level of the battery (percentage),
the Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Mobile
network state, My phone number, IMEI number, IMEISV, IP address,
Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up time, and
Device status.
375
• Legal information
: This option displays information about Open source
licences, Google legal information, Samsung Legal, as well as License
settings. This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of
Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent
information as a reference.
Read the information and terms, then press
to return to the
Settings menu.
• Device name
: allows you to both display and edit the device’s name.
• Model number
: displays the device’s model number.
• Android version
: displays the firmware version loaded on this device.
•Baseband version
: displays the baseband version loaded on this
device.
•Kernel version
: displays the kernel version loaded on this device.
• Build number
: displays the software, build number.
Note:
Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional information
please contact your customer service representative.
• SE for Android status
: displays the status of SELinux. SELinux is a set
of security policies/modules which is applied to the device to improve the
overall security.
• Secure boot status
: displays the type used for the boot status.
Changing Your Settings 376
Software Update
The Software Update feature feature enables you to use your phone
to connect to the network and upload any new phone software
directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the
latest available software when you access this option.
To update your device:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
Settings
(
More
tab)
About device
Software update
.
2. The phone automatically updates the software (if available),
otherwise, when the
Software update
prompt displays, tap
OK
.
3. When updating software, once the update file is downloaded,
you can delay the update on the start screen by postponing it
for a certain period of time. If you want to resume the update
before the selected time, touch
Continue update
.
377
Section 11: Health and Safety
Information
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi
™
mode in the 2.4 and
5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices operating within 5.15-
5.25 GHz may only be used indoors, not outside, in order to avoid
interference with Mobile Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this
device is restricted from being used outdoors when operating in
frequencies between 5.15-5.25 GHz.
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using
your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used in
this section to refer to your phone.
Read this information before using
your mobile device
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) exposure
from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the following
information:
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over the
past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking
at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell
phones. While some researchers have reported biological changes
associated with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
Health and Safety
Information 378
The majority of studies published have failed to show an association
between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health
problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially
reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure
to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no
known adverse health effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in
X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a
process where electrons are stripped away from their normal
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, including
both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause
ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of
non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include
visible light, infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of
electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two areas of
the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF
heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry
away excess heat.
379
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF
and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a
connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that
the weight
of scientific evidence does not show an association between
exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and adverse
health outcomes. Still the scientific community has supported
additional research to address gaps in knowledge. Some of these
studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology (June,
2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000 people with
brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar number
of
healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show
that
cell phones caused brain
cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain
cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use of
cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every day, for
over 10 years)
the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer.
However, the authors determined that biases and errors prevented
any conclusions being drawn from this data. Additional information
about Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.
Health and Safety Information 380
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research is
being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to monitor
developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring of
a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues
linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell
phone use. The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300,000
adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional
information about the COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html
.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency
Fields in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship
between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication
technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people.
This is an international multi-center study involving 14 European and
non-European countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS
can be found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program
of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer statistics
in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for
brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer, rates
should go up, because heavy cell phone use has been common for
quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987 and 2005, the overall
381
age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase. Additional
information about SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/
.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number
of steps, including the following:
•
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type
of signal emitted by cell phones;
•
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user;
and
•
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information
on cell phone use and human health concerns.
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies such
as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), the
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
(ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards continue to
adequately protect the public.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy (RF)
from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that there is - it
is probably very small. But, if you are concerned about avoiding even
potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF
exposure.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
Health and Safety Information 382
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your
head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth
®
headsets and
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy
absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is
held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used
against the head and against the body.
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits
reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience and
comfort.
They are also required by law in many states if you want to
use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF
Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories
which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks.
Some products that
claim to shield the user from RF absorption use
special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a
metallic accessory attached to the phone.
383
Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as
advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may
interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be
forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in
RF absorption.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell
phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers. The
steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and
teenagers as well.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head
and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised
that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all. For
example, The Stewart Report from
the United Kingdom made such a
recommendation in December 2000. In this report, a group of
independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell
phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any
health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various
sources can be obtained from the following organizations (updated
10/1/2010):
•
FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
Health and Safety Information 384
•
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
•
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
•
World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
•
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
•
Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
•
US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed
and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio
Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National Council
on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of
385
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the
recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering
experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after
extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological
effects of RF energy.
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption
Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF
energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram
(W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety
limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give
additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in
measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR
is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR
level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum
reported value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station
antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it must
be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR
limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model phone are
performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear and worn on the
body) as required by the FCC. For body-worn operation, this phone
Health and Safety Information 386
has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used
with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the
mobile device a minimum of 1.0cm from the body.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF
exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an Equipment
Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels
evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines.
This mobile phone has a FCC ID number: A3LSGHI257 [Model
Number: SM-S890L] and the specific SAR levels for this mobile
phone can be found at the following FCC website:
http://www.fcc.gov/
oet/ea/
.
The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsung’s
website:
http://www.samsung.com/sar
.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed
online on the FCC's website through
http://transition.fcc.gov/oet/
rfsafety/sar.html
. To find information that pertains to a particular
model phone, this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is
usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it
may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number.
Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or
maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional SAR information
can also be obtained at
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-cellular-
telephones
.
387
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could
void your authority to operate the device.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Health and Safety Information 388
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from
the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS"; which may also be
known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network ("PLAN")). If your
wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are
available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside
your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his
or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to
passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary
task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.
Do not engage
in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to
take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired
.
Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving
drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their
accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use
of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For
example, only hands-free use may be permitted in certain areas.
389
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an
automobile:
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call go
to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember, driving
comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these tips:
•
Use a hands-free device;
•
Secure your phone within easy reach;
•
Place calls when you are not moving;
•
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
•
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
•
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and
will suspend the call if necessary;
•
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near
the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law may permit
mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile. Be
sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you
drive before mounting this device in an automobile. Failure to comply
with these restrictions could result in fines, penalties, or other
damages.
Never mount t
his device in a manner that will obstruct the driver's
clear view of the street and traffic.
Health and Safety Information 390
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games while
operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to
http://www.ctia.org
.
Battery Use and Safety
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage
. Most battery issues arise from improper handling
of batteries and, particularly, from the continued use of
damaged batteries.
•
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to
change the form of your battery
. Do not put a high degree of pressure
on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-circuit,
resulting in overheating.
•
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids
can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even when the
phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally, the circuitry
could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the phone and/or battery
get wet, have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung,
even if they appear to be working properly.
•
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source
. Excessive heating
can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the
battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or
heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid
leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures.
391
•
Caution: Some applications or prolonged usage may increase device
temperature.
Prolonged skin contact with a device that is hot to the touch
may produce skin discomfort or redness, or low-temperature burns. If the
device feels hot to the touch, discontinue use and close all applications or
turn off the device until it cools. Always ensure that the phone has
adequate ventilation and air flow. Covering the device with bedding, your
body, thick clothing or any other materials that significantly affect air flow
may affect the performance of the phone and poses a possible risk of fire
or explosion, which could lead to serious bodily injuries or damage to
property.
•
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire
. The phone or the
battery may explode when overheated.
•
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery
. Do not let leaking battery
fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe disposal
options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service center.
•
Avoid dropping the cell phone
. Dropping the phone or the battery,
especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the phone
and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take it to a
service center for inspection.
•
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way
.
•
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects
. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry, clip,
or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals of the
battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry a spare
battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the
battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.
Health and Safety Information 392
Important!
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your
battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a risk
of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard
. Samsung's warranty does
not cover damage to the phone caused by nonSamsung-approved
batteries and/or chargers.
•
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers
. Some
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If
unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,
contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
•
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk
of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to
your phone, or other serious hazard
.
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to
recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must be
recycled or disposed of properly.
393
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile
device by working with respected take-back companies in every
state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be
found at:
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at
these locations for no fee.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information
regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/index.htm
or at
http://www.call2recycle.org/
.
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung
customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to
http://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp
and follow the
instructions to print out a free pre-paid postage label and then
send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via
U.S. Mail, for recycling.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an a
pproved recycler.
Health and Safety Information 394
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices
and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local
regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in household
or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect the
environment - recycle!
Warning!
Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety
requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions per
UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA,
USE AN A TTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER
CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET.
395
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR
MOUNT POSITION.
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your mobile
device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic
and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it
receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or
cracked as this could cause injury to you.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN
MOBILE DEVICE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please note
that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the pad
of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or
a metallic object when pressing on the touch-screen may
damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, please refer to the “Standard Limited
Warranty”.
GPS & AGPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses
satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to
changes implemented in accordance with the Department of
Health and Safety Information 396
Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).
Changes may affect the performance of location-based technology
on your mobile device.
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global
Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the
cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your
wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data
charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with
your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for details.
Your Location
Location-based information includes information that can be used to
determine the approximate location of a mobile device. Mobile
devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit
location-based information. Additionally, if you use applications that
require location-based information (e.g. driving directions), such
applications transmit location-based information. The
location-based information may be shared with third-parties,
including your wireless service provider, applications providers,
Samsung, and other third-parties providing services.
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the
emergency responders your approximate location.
AGPS has limitations and
might not work in your area
. Therefore:
•
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your
ability; and
•
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder
instructs you.
397
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data relating
to your current location, may contain inaccurate or incomplete data,
and circumstances can and do change over time. In some areas,
complete information may not be available. T
herefore, you should
always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are
consistent with what you see before following them. All users should
pay attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors
that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road
signs
.
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates using
radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as
user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection in
all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile
device for essential communications (medical emergencies, for
example). Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan
an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel.
Remember, to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device
networks or when certain network services and/or mobile device
features are in use. Check with local service providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the mobile device is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap
.
Health and Safety Information 398
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location (for
example, 911 or other official emergency number). Emergency
numbers vary by location.
4. Tap
.
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may
first need to deactivate those features before you can make an
emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular
service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give
all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember
that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at
the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call until given
permission to do so.
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship
and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you
fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for
many years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids
contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the
mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the
use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage
the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may
cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.
399
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing
so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth
slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. If the
mobile device has a retractable camera lens, do not use soap
and water to clean the lens. Use a blower or brush or lens
cleaning paper dampened in a lens cleaning solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling
can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper
operation.
Responsible Listening
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss
.
Health and Safety Information 400
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds
over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played
louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds
(including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing
loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio
devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at high
volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds,
and Bluetooth
®
or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud
sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a
ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing.
Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced
by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the
sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As a
result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for
everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and
equipment.
You should follow some common sense recommendations when
using any portable audio device:
•
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio
source.
•
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at
which you can hear adequately.
•
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.
401
•
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what
you are listening to.
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose
to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than
when using earbuds.
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is
required before you hearing could be affected.
•
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as
rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience
ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience any temporary
hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue
use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
Health and Safety Information 402
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email
:
nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet
:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
403
Email: [email protected]
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and
always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use
it, or when it may cause interference or danger. When connecting the
mobile device or any accessory to another device, read its user's
guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible
products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency
(RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be
shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device.
Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
•
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from their
implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;
•
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
Health and Safety Information 404
•
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize
the potential for interference;
•
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to
suspect that interference is taking place;
•
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using your
wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device, consult your
health care provider.
For more information see:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html#
.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded
from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in
obtaining this information. Switch your mobile device off in health
care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct
you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded
electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer
or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile
device in a motor vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer
of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices
require you to do so.
405
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in
such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury
or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile device off
while at a refueling point (service station).
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of
radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),
chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas
with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always,
clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer
or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals or
particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area
where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane)
must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58).
For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association.
When your Device is Wet
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on,
turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if the device will not
turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry
the device with a towel and take it to a service center.
Health and Safety Information 406
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established
requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible
with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices (hearing
aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile devices, they may
detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices
are more immune than others to this interference noise, and mobile
devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for
wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile
devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all
mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices that are rated have
the rating on their box or a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on the
user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use
a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile device with
your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal
needs.
M-Ratings
: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing
devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is the better/
higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to enabling acoustic
coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode.
407
T-Ratings
: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and
are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than
mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher of the two
ratings. T-ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing
aids operating in telecoil mode.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid manufacturer or
hearing health professional may help you find this rating. Higher
ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to
interference noise.
Under the current industry standard, American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and wireless mobile device
rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are
together. For example, if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and
the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the
two values equals M5.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user with
normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless
mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent
performance.
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied. T
ratings work similarly.
Health and Safety Information 408
M3 + M2 = 5
T3 + T2 = 5
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.
HAC for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for
some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may
be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have
not been tested yet for use with hearing aids.
It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly
and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant,
to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service
provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing
aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange
policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.
409
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it
because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the mobile
device, or make calls that increase your mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the
reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to
stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be
eliminated.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly
approved by Samsung could void your warranty for this equipment
and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved
batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty
if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device.
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or
sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
•
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the
mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous
and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.
Health and Safety Information 410
•
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your
vehicle are securely mounted.
•
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle
is mounted and operating properly.
•
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can build up
in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock. To minimize
the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the
headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted
metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset.
•
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in
the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or accessories.
•
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates
with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable
wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag
deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air
bag inflates, serious injury could result.
•
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the
aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before using any
function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.
•
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial
of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.
•
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold
the screen too close to your eyes.
411
•
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights
while watching videos or playing games for extended periods. If you feel
any discomfort, stop using the device immediately.
•
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively perform
actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with
your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort
in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using
your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip,
press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have
discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
•
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or light close
to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
Health and Safety Information 412
Section 12: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC (“SAMSUNG”)
warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and accessories (“Products”)
are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by
the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
Device 1 Year
Battery(ies)*
1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster*
90 Days
Other Device
Access
ories*
1 Year
*If applicab
le.
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product.
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions,
improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or
dirt, neglect, or unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical
stress; (b) scratches, dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by
SAMSUNG; (c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or
use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
413
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data
code removed, d
efaced, damaged, altered or made illegible;
(e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage resulting from the
use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories,
products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or
approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from
improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or
damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an
object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake,
exposure to weather conditions, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of
any electrical source; (i) defects or damage resulting from cellular
signal reception or transmission, or viruses or other software
problems introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or
purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or
the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any
battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not
specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any
of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of
tampering; or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than
the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is
returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty,
SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG’s sole
option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG’s sole option,
Warranty Information 414
use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when
repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a rebuilt,
reconditioned or new Product.
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for
a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Products will
be warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original
Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety (90) days,
whichever is longer. All replaced Products, parts, components,
boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG.
Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return the
Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate
container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or
comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase, the
serial number of the Product and the seller’s name and address.
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please call
SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If SAMSUNG
determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty,
you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or
return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the
Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty
service, as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted
during the course of warranty service.
415
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT
OR FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT;
LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING
FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES
AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG
AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE
QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR
SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED
IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO
INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE
PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY
SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY,
CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF
Warranty Information 416
ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY
WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed
to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the
Products. No agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is
authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make
binding representations or claims, whether in advertising,
presentations or otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the
Products or this Limited Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights that vary from state to state.
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE
OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a
dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or claim, and
specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any
circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall
be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not
exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law.
The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American
Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules
applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of
Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern
417
the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are
subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all
issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision
and the Limited Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of
atto
rney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less (“Small
Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable
attorney fees, expert witness fees
and costs as part of any award,
but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or
costs unless it is determined that
the claim was brought in b
ad f
aith.
In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half
of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of
such fees, whichever is less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the rema
inder
of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for
arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive o
f attorney
fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case,
the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among
the parties, reasonable attorney f
ees, expert witness
fees and costs.
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator’s award in any court of
competent jurisdiction.
This arbitr
ation provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG’s
employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises
from the Product’s sale, condition or performance.
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing
notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the
first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the Product. To opt out, you
must send notice by e-mail to [email protected], with the
subject line: “Arbitration Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out
Warranty Information 418
e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) t
he date on which the Product
was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the
IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information
screen, which can be found under
“Settings;” (iii) on a label on the
back of the Product beneath the
battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the outside of the
Product if the battery is not removable). Alternatively, you may opt out
by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date
of the first consumer purchaser’s
purchase of the Product and
providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice
that
will be effective to opt out of
this dispute resolution procedure.
Opting out of
this
dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to
enjoy
the benefits
of the Limited Warranty.
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not
affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and
reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this
sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s
Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear which
419
will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default
settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center
for
details.
Important!
Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this
service at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the
device, charges may apply.
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written
approval. Specifica
tions and availability subject to change without
notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement
("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a
single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for
software, owned by Samsung and its affiliated companies and its
third party suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA,
which includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation in
connection with your use of this device ("Software").
Warranty Information 420
This device r
equires the use of preloaded software in its normal
operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE,
YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT
THESE TERMS,
DO NOT USE
THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE.
1.
GRANT OF LICENSE
. Samsung grants you the following rights
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA:
You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of the
Software
on the local hard disk(s) or
other permanent storage media
of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a
mobile device at a time, and you may not make the Software
available over a network where it could be used by multiple
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the
Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only;
provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other
proprietary notices contained on the original.
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source
licenses. The open source license provisions may override some of
the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable open source
licenses
available t
o you on the Legal
Notices section of the Settings
menu of your device.
2.
RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP
. Samsung reserves all
rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software is
protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and other
intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is licensed,
not sold.
3.
LIMITATIONS ON END USER R IGHTS
. You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source
code or algorithms of, the Software (except and only to the extent
421
that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not
withstanding this limitation), or modify, or disable any features of,
the Software, or create derivative works based on the Software. You
may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4.
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA
. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part
of the product support services related to the Software provided to
you, if any, such as
IMEI(your device's unique identification number),
device number, model name, customer code, access recording,
your
device's current SW version, MCC (Mobile Country
Code), MNC
(Mobile Network Code).
Samsung and its affiliates
may use this
information solely to improve their
products or to provide customized
services
or technologies to
you and will not disclose this information
in a form that personally identifies you. At all times your
information
will be treated in accordance with Samsung's Privacy Policy, which
can be viewed at:
http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp
.
5.
SOFTWARE UPDATES
. Samsung may provide to you or make
available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and add-on
components (if any) of the Software related to
security, including bug
fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices, and
updates and enhancements to any software for security previously
installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively “Update”)
after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software related to
security to improve such Software
and ultimately enhance your user
experience with your device. This EULA applies to all and any
component of the Update that Samsung may provide to you or make
available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
Warranty Information 422
Software related to security, unless we provide other terms along
with such Update. To use Software related to security provided
through Update, you must first be licensed for the Software identified
by Samsung as eligible for the Update. After the Update, you may no
longer use the Software that formed the basis for your Update
eligibility. The updated Software version may add new functions and,
in some limited cases, may delete existing functions.
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by your
network carrier, and such Software updates will be governed by your
contractual relationship with your network carrier.
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the default
setting in the Security menu in the Setting), your device downloads
some Updates automatically from time to time. Given the importance
of receiving Updates for security software in a timely manner to
defend against new threats, such Update may be automatically
downloaded and installed. We recommend that you check
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of your
device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for the Update
downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi Only” option in the
Setting.
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to have
access to the intern
et and may be subject to restrictions imposed by
your network or internet provider. Unless
your device is connected
to the internet through Wi-Fi connection, the Software will access
through your mobile network, which may result in additional charges
depending on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of
some
features
of the Software may be affected by the suitability and
performance of your device hardware or data access.
423
7.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER
. You may not transfer this EULA or the rights
to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in
connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software
accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include all of the
Software (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not retain any
copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer,
such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving
the Software must agree to all the EUL
A terms.
8.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS
. You acknowledge that the Software is
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply
to the Software, including all the applicable export restriction laws
and regulations.
9.
TERMINATION
. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your rights
under this License will terminate automatically without notice from
Samsung if you fail to comply with
any of the terms and conditions of
this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of
the Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the Software.
10.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED IN A
WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING YOUR
DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE
DEVICE (WHETHER INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS
AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
Warranty Information 424
SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY,
LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER
ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG OR ITS
AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY
SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO
CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG.
11.
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS
. Certain third party applications may
be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device. Samsung
makes no representations whatsoever about any of these
applications. Since Samsung has no control over such applications,
you acknowledge and agree that Samsung is not responsible for
the
availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for
any content, advertising, products, services, or other
materials on or
available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge and
agree that use of third party applications
is at your sole risk and that
the entire risk of unsatisfactory
quality, performance, accuracy and
effort is with you. It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that
whatever you select to use
is free of such items as viruses, worms,
Trojan horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on
this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or
services of
any
third-parties are provided
solely as a convenience to
you, and do not
constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship, or
recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its products
and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be responsible or
425
liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or loss, including but not
limited to any damage to the mobile device or loss of data, caused or
alleged to be caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on
any such third party content, products, or services available on or
through any such application. You acknowledge and agree that the
use of any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy
Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or personal
data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such
third-party application provider, will be subject to such third party
application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy exists.
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE
OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION
IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE
USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
12.
SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS
. Certain Samsung applications and
services may be included with, or downloaded to, this mobile device.
Many of them require Samsung Services membership registration
("Samsung Account"), and your rights and obligations will be set
forth in separate Samsung Account
terms and conditions and privacy
policies. There are non-Samsung Account applications and services
that require your consent to
their separate terms
and conditions and
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use
of such applications and services
will be subject to the applicable
terms and conditions and privacy policies.
Warranty Information 426
13.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE
USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO
ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO
CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES, AND ALL
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING THE
FOREGOING,
SAMSUNG
ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU
FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR
THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY
OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL
NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT
PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND
DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10, 11, 12 AND 13) SHALL
APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
14.
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS
. The Software
is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software
427
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other end
users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Products are
provided only with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are
granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal
Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
15.
APPLICABLE LAW
. This EULA is governed by the laws of the
jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of the United
States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without regard to its conflict
of law provisions. This EULA shall not be governed by the UN
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the
application of which is expressly excluded.
16.
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of the
Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction where you
are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Samsung may apply
for injunctive remedies (or
an equivalent
type of urgent legal relief) in
any jurisdiction.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING
IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING
ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute
shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person's or
entity's claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the
foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a
class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the
Warranty Information 428
relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be
conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA)
Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This
arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration
Act. The laws
of the State of Texas,
without reference to its choice of
laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in which your
total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness
fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may,
if you
prevail, award your reasonable
attorney fees, expert witness fees
and costs as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its
attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined
that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a
Small Claim case, you
shall be required to
pay no more
than half of the total administrative,
facility and
arbitrator
fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less,
and Samsung shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative,
facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage
claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to AAA
rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the
prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney
fees, expert witness fees
and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This
arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung's
employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises
from the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to
Samsung no later
429
than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out, you must send
notice by e-mail to
optout@s
ta.samsung.com
, with the subject line:
"Arbitration Opt Out."
You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was purchased;
(c) the device model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI or
MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID
or Serial Number can be found (i) on the device box; (ii) on the device
information screen, which can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a
label on the back of the device beneath the battery, if the battery is
removable; and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the
first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and providing the
same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of
this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the
device or its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
17.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY
. This EULA is the entire
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and
supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written
communications, proposals and representations with respect to the
Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If any
provision of this EULA is held to
be void, invalid, unenforceable or
illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.
[090413]
Warranty Information
430
Index
Numerics
3-Sec Pause
Adding
62
A
ABC 86
Acces to My Location 229
Accessibility
Text Booster 225
Accessing
Rece
ntly-used
applications 194
Voicemail 21
Accessory 337
Dock Sound
337
Account
s and Sync
Adding Contacts
118
Add 3 Sec Pause 65
, 105
Add to Favorites
125
Adjusting
Call volume
71
Adobe PDF 249
Air Gesture
Quick Glance
55
Airplane
Mode
On
300
Alarm
Deletin
g an Existing Alarm
205
Setting
203
Turning Off 205
Alerts
Presidential
140
Alerts on Call 325
AllShare Play
see Sams
ung Link
256
,
258
AllShareCast Hub 257
AMBER Alerts 140
Disable 142
Android Beam 305
Ans
wering
Home Key 324
, 327
Answering a Call 63
Application Menus
Navigating through 56
Applications
Calculator
196
Camera 199
Email
209
Google Mail 210
Google Maps 228
messaging 230
431
My Account Downloader
237
Sharing with Others
46
Show Turned Off 194
Shutting Down 195
Storage Used 371
Using the Camcorder 176
Usi
ng the Camera 165
Video
262
Voice Recorder 264
YouTube
273
Applications and
Developm
ent 192
Apps
Adding
41
Reset Preferences 372
Apps Screen
Customizing
193
Area Code
Auto Assign
329
Audio
Output Mode
337
Auto Redial 329
, 330
Auto Reject
Configuration
64
Auto Reject List 324
Auto Reject Mode 324
Automatic Answering 325
Automatic Restore 357
B
Back up
My Account 357
My Data
357
Backup and Restore 357
Battery
Charging
14
Display Percentage 16
Extend
ing Life
17
Installing 13
Low Battery Indicator 16
Removal 13
Show Percentage 317
Wall Charger 14
Battery Cover
Removal
11
Replace 13
Battery Life
Exte
nding
17
Battery Usage 372
Battery Use & Safety 391
Bigger Font
Setting 339
Blocking Mo
de 335
On
335
432
Bluetooth 297
About
276
Change Name 277
Changing Name 297
Configure Device S
ettings
280
Deleting a Paired Device
281
Device Name
19
Disconnecting a Paired
Device
281
Media Audio 280
Microphone Function 280
Off
276
, 297
On 276
, 297
Outgoing Headset
Condition
325
, 328
Paring Devices
279
Review Downloaded Files
278
Scan for Devices
278
Scanning for ot
her Devices
298
Sending Contact
Information
282
Sending Contacts Via 282
Sending Namecard 114
Set Visibility
278
Settings 277
Status indicators 277
Switching to Headset
during call
73
Turning on and off 276
,
297
Visibility
298
Visible Time-Out 278
Bookmarks
Backing Up
361
Browser
Adding bookmarks
221
Deleting bookmarks 222
Emptying cookies 222
Enter
ing a URL 218
Navigation
216
Options 216
Resetting Default Actions
372
Settings
224
Bubble
Options
135
Burst Shots 167
C
Calculator
Scientific Functions
196
Calendar
Cre
ating an event 198
Settings
198
Sync Calendars 197
433
Call
Accessories 325
Settings
62
, 64, 324
Call Alert
Call Vibrations
325
, 328
Call Alerts
325
Call Answering/Ending 324
Call Barring 329
Call Duration 82
Resetting Times
82
Call Forwarding
Configuring
329
Call Functions 58
Answering
63
Background Calling 59
Ending
60
Ending a Call 60
Ending via Status Bar 60
Making a Multi-Party C
all
75
Pause Dialing
65
Redialing the last nu
mber
67
Vibrate
326
Wait Dialing 66
Call Rejection 64
, 324
Call Settings
324
Additional Settings 328
General 324
Call Sound
Adding More Volume
71
Personalize 71
, 72
Call Status Tones 325
Call Vibration 325
, 328
Call Volume
Adjusting
71
Call Waiting 77
, 329, 330
Caller ID
328
Calls
Auto Reject 324
Making a
58
Multi-party 75
Mut
ing 73
Camcorder 17
6
Accessing the Video Folder
177
Settings
171
Shoo
ting Video 176
Camera 164
Camera Options 167
Enabling Sh
are Shot 180
Quick Settings 169
Settings 171
Taking Pictures 165
Care and Maintenance 399
Charging battery 14
ChatON
200
Adding a Buddy 201
434
Adding New Buddy 201
Buddy photo share 174
Chatting On 202
Deleting Bubble 202
Register Service 200
Children and Cell Phones 384
Chrome
Google 202
CMAS 140
, 141
Commercial Mobile Alerting
System (CMAS)
389
Configuration
Initial
18
Connections
Access
ing the Internet
216
Contact
Copying to microSD Card
115
Copying to SIM Card
115
Creating a New 98
Linking 110
New From Keypad 101
Photo
186
Contact En
try
Options
109
Contact List
Options
106
Contact Me
nus
Options 107
Contact
s
Adding a Number to
Existin
g
104
Adding a Paus
e or Wait
105
Adding Your Facebook
Friends
119
Additional Options 120
Deleting
106
Display Options 117
, 121
Displaying Contacts by
Name 121
Export List to microSD 358
First Name First 121
Groups 122
Import from micr
oSD 358
Last Name First
121
Merge with Samsung
Account
107
Sending All 113
Sett
ing Default Location
107
Settings
121
Sharing Settings 121
Sharing/Sending 113
435
Contacts List 58
Context Menus 104
, 107
Navigation
57
Using 57
Continuous Input
Samsung Keyboard
342
Cookies
Emptying
222
Copying Contact 115
Cr
eate Folder
Group Apps 193
Creating a Playlist 234
Creating
and sending
Messages 127
Customizing
Home screens
44
D
Data
Auto Sync Data
300
Restrict Backgr
ound Data
300
Data Limit
Setting
299
Data Usage
Cycle
299
Limiting 299
Date
Selecting Format
375
Date and Time 374
De
fault Storage
Assigning
164
Camcor
der 164
Camera
164
Deleting
Multi
ple Messages
136
Single Bubble 136
Single Message 136
Deleting a c
ontact 106
Deregister
Web Storage 260
Desk Clock
203
Configuring 206
Device
Reset 363
Device Name
Edit
376
Device Options
Screen
320
Display
Icons
30
Settings 29
Status Bar 30
Using Negative Colors 339
Display / Touch-Screen 396
D
isplaying your phone
number 58
436
Do cell phones pose a health
hazard?
378
Dock
Sound
337
Downloading
New application 247
Down
loads 208
Draft Messages 129
Drive
208
Sending Contacts 106
Sending Namecards 114
Dropb
ox
259
E
Easy Mode 323
Edit Page 45
Editing a Picture 187
Email 145
Changing Signature 151
,
158
Composing
149
Configuring Settings 150
Creating a Spam List 151
,
157
Creating an Internet
Account
146
Handwritten Signature
151
, 158
Internet Email 146
Opening
148
Refreshing Messages 149
Sending
120
Wi-Fi Download of
Attachments
152
, 159
Emergency
Alert Preview 140
Alerts 140
Emergency Alert
Conf
iguration
141
Emergency Alert
s 140
AMBER
140
Extreme 140
Message Settings 140
Severe
140
Emergency Ca
lls 398
Making
60
With SIM 61
Without S
IM 60
Emoticons
130
Ending
A call
60
Entering Text 83
Using SWYPE
84
Erasing Files
Memory Card
374
Exchange Email 153
Account Setu
p 153
Composing
157
Configuring Settings 157
437
Deleting Message 157
Opening
156
Refreshing Messages 156
Exposure to R
adio Frequency
(RF) Signals
378
Extra Volume 71
Extreme Alert
Disable
142
F
Face Unlock 310, 311
Facebook
Personalize
344
Predictive Text 344
Facial Recognition 310
Factor
y Data Reset 363
Prior To 358
Favorites Tab 125
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility
(HAC
) Regulations for
Wireless Devices 407
FCC Notice and Cautions 410
Fixed Dialing Numbers 330
Folder
Create
42
Font
Size
317
Style 317
Font Size
Caption
273
Changing 339
Forgot Patt
ern? 313
G
Galaxy Gear 22
Gallery
Folder Options
185
Opening 190
Picture-In-Picture 263
Games
Volume
320
Gesture
Settings
350
Gestures
Overview
54
Getting Started 8
Battery
12
Battery Cover 10
Locking/Unlocking the
Device
19
microSD card 11
Switching Device On/Off
18
Voicemail 20
Gmail 161
, 210
Composing a Message
162
Creating an Additional
Account
163
Opening 161
, 211
438
Other Options 162
Personalize
344
Refreshing 161
Signing In 161
Viewing
162
Google
Backing Up Settings 362
Settings
212
Signing into Y
our Account
210
Voice Typing
83
Google Books 241
Google Drive 208
see Drive
208
Google Mail
see also Gmail
162
Google Maps
Enabling a locatio
n source
228
Opening a map 229
Google Music
243
Google Now 266
Adjust Settings
212
Google Talk
see Hangouts
215
Google Voice Typing
Configurin
g
347
Using 96
GPS & AGPS 396
Group
Joining
215
Group Play 213
, 214
Creating a Group
214
Joining a Group 215
S Memo
252
Share Music 232
Share Pictures 173
Sharing Pictures 214
Groups
Adding an Member to an
Existin
g Group
123
Creating a new caller
gr
oup 122
Deleting
124
Deleting a Caller
Group
124
Editing a Caller Group
124
Removing an Entry 123
Se
ttings
124
Gyroscope
Calibratio
n
56
, 352
H
Hands-Free Mode
On
336
Hangouts 215
HDR 167
439
378
Health and Safety Information
Hearing Aids 326
, 340
Hold
Placing a Call on Hold 72
Home 38
Home Key 41
Home Screen
Assigning a New
46
Changing Wallpaper 50
Menu Settings 41
Overview 38
Home screens
Customizing
44
Homepage
Setting New
221
I
Icons
Description 30
Indicator
30
Status 30
Images
Assigning as a Contact
icon
186
Assigning as wallpaper
187
Transferring 360
Ver
ifying
360
Importing and
Exporting
To micro SIM card
121
In Call
Options
70
In call
Options
74
Incognito 219
Create Window 220
Exit Wind
ow
220
Indicator icons 30
International Call 65
International Calls
Making
65
Internet 216
Brightness Setting 218
Desktop View
218
Search 218
Set Homepage 224
Set New Homepage 221
Internet Email 145
IP Address 375
IR
Smart Remote
22
L
Language
Select 341
LDAP
107
Linking
Contact Information
110
440
Live Wallpaper
Selecting
51
Lock Pattern
If I For
got My Pattern 313
Lock Screen
308
Changing Wallpaper 52
Customizing Shortcuts
315
Say Wake-Up Command
309
Shortcuts
309
Using Shortcuts 315
Viewing Missed Calls 82
Logs
78
Accessing 78
Accessing from
Notif
ications
79
Altering Numbers 81
Erasing 81
Low battery indicator 16
M
Making
Emergency Calls
60
Internationa
l Calls 65
New call 58
Mana
ging Applications
Clearing Application
Cache 369
Uninstalling Third-party
Applications
369
Market
see Play Store
247
Marking c
ontact
As a default 112
Media
Backing Up to mi
croSD
Card 360
Backing Up to PC
359
Memory Card
Er
asing Files 374
Merge Calls
75
Merge with Google 107
Message
Options 128
Read 133
Register a Number as
Spam
135
Reply 134
, 202
Thread Options 135
Threads
134
Message Search 137
Message threads 134
Messaging
Adding a Signature 140
Adding Attachments 131
Additional Text 132
441
Block Unknown Senders
141
, 144
Creating and sending 127
Creating and Sending Text
Messages
127
Current Message Options
130
Deleting a mess
age 136
Draft
129
Google Mail 161
Icons on the Status Bar
127
Insert Smiley
130
Locked 129
Menu Options 128
Options 128
Scheduled Messages 129
Settings
137
Signature 140
Signing into Google Mail
161
Spam
129
Text Templates 145
Translate Text 131
Types of Messages 126
Viewing new 133
micro SIM Card
Changing Existing PIN
366
Importing and Exporting
121
Lock
365
Setting Up Lock 365
microSD Card
Insertion
11
Removal 12
Microsoft Exchange 99
, 145
Missed Call
Viewing from Lock Screen
82
Mobile Data
Activate/Deactivate 299
Set Data Limit 299
Usage 301
Mobile Networks 301
Mobile Data 301
Mobile Web 21
6
Entering Text in the Mobile
Web Browser 218
Navigati
ng with the Mobile
Web
216
Using Bookmarks 220
Mono
Audio Setup
340
Motion
Activate
55
, 351
Browse Image
351
Direct Call 351
442
Mute/Pause 352
On
55
, 351
Overview 54
Settings 350
Smart Alert 351
Zoom
351
Mounting the SD card 373
Multi-Party Call
75
Dropping One Participant
76
Private conversation
76
Multi-party call
Setting up
75
Multi-party calls 75
Multi-Tasking
Background Calling 59
Watching Videos 263
Music
230
Adding Music 234
Creating a Playlist 234
Editing a Playlist
235
Making a Song a Ringtone
231
Option
s
232
Playing Music 230
Removing Music 235
,
236
Using Playlists 234
Volume
320
Music App
Music Applicatio
n 243
Now Playing Screen 245
Playing
244
Searching for Music 244
Tab Options
244
Music File Extensions
3GP
230
AAC 230
AAC+ 230
eAAC+ 230
M4A
230
MP3 230
MP4 230
WMA 230
Music Files
Remov
ing 236
Transferring 236
My Account D
ownloader 237
My Places 229
, 364
N
Namecard
Sending
113
Sending All 113
Share Via 113
Navigat
ing
Application Menus
56
Sub-Menus 57
Through Screens 52
443
Navigation 240
Negative Colors 339
Network connection
Adding a new
286
New applications
Downloading
247
NFC (Near Fi
eld
Communication) 305
Noise Reduction 71
Notification Bar 42
Using
42
Notification
Panel
Customize
316
Notification
s
Default
322
Volume 320
O
On/Off Switch 18
Operating Environment 404
Organizer
Calculator 196
World Clock 205
Other Impor
tant Safety
Information 410
Outlook 145
Overview
Home Screen
38
P
Palm Motion
Activate 55
, 352
On
55
, 352
Passwor
ds
Make Visible
366
Pause
Adding to a Contact
105
Pause Dialing 65
Personal Localized Alerting
Network (PLAN)
389
Personalize
Call Sound
71
Phone
Icons
30
Switching on/off 18
Phone number
Finding
58
Phone Ringtone 321
Phone Vibration 321
Photo
Editing 187
Photos 241
Change Player 173
Options 173
, 175, 178
Sharing
173
, 175, 178
Picture
Color Correction
189
Face Corrections 189
444
Frame 189
Set As 186
Streaming from Gallery
185
Pictur
e-In-Picture 263
Pictures
Instant Sharing 180
Sharing 179
, 183
Play Books 241
Play Store 247
Quick Access
193
Pointer Speed
Configuration
350
Power
Auto Adjust Screen Tone
317
Power Saving
CPU Power
336
LCD Adjustment 317
Learning About 337
Screen Power 337
Power Saving Mode 336
Predictive Text
Acti
vation
343
Prepend
Area Code
329
Primary Shortcuts 40
Adding and
Deleting
48
Customizing 48
Replacing 48
Q
Quick Dialing 59
Quick Messaging 128
R
Recently-used Applications
Accessing
194
Red Eye
Correction
189
Redialing the last number 67
Reducing Ex
posure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
382
Reject Call
Rejection Messages
324
Reject Calls
Managing
64
Reject List
Add To
64
Add to 80
, 81
Auto Reject
65
Rejection List
Assigning Multiple
Numbers 64
As
signing Single Numbers
65
Rejection Messages
Set Up
324
445
Reset 363
Reset App Preferences 372
Reset Device
363
Responsible Listening 400
Restarting
Device
19
Restore 357
Restrict
Background Data
300
Restricting Children's Access
to Your Mobile device
410
Ringtone
Assigning
326
Assigning Voicemail 333
Device
321
Volume 320
Ringtones
Set Up
321
S
S Beam 305
On
183
, 306
Sharing Multiple Pictures
184
Sharing Pictures 183
S Memo
Creating a New Memo
250
S Translator
Translate Text
253
Translate Using Voice 253
S Voice 254
Set Wake-Up Command
309
Using
254
Samsung A
ccount
Backing Up Bookmarks
361
Creating
356
Merge Contacts 107
Samsung K
eyboard 90
ABC Mode
94
Changing the In
put Type
92
Enabling
90
Entering Symbols 95
Predictive Text Settings
343
Reset Settings
343
Settings 341
Symbol/Numeric Mode 94
Samsung L
ink
Configuring Settings 258
Definitions
256
Deregister Stor
age 260
Sharing Media
260
Web Storage Setup 259
Samsung M
obile Products
and Recycling 393
446
Save a Number
From Keypad
101
Screen
Home
38
Navigation 52
Screen Lock
Set Up
312
Sounds 322
Screen Lock Patter
n
Changing
312
Creating 311
Deleting 313
Forgot My Pattern 313
Screen M
irroring
Activation
307
On 307
Screen Rotation
Auto-Rotate
317
Screen Timeout 317
Screen Unlock
Face and Voic
e Unlock
311
Face Unlock 310
Swipe
309
Screens
Adding and
Deleting
45
Customizing 44
Rearranging 46
SD card
Mounting the
373
Unmounting 373
Security
Auto Update
367
Sending a Namecard 113
Setting an alarm
203
Setting Up
Voicem
ail 20
Settings 171
, 289
Accessing 289
Browser 224
Call 62
Contact list 121
Display 29
Enabling the GPS Satellites
364
Enabling Wireless
Locations 364
Messaging
137
Tab Overview 289
Wall
paper 51
, 52
Setup
Initial
18
Severe Alert
Disable
142
Share Applications 46
Share Shot
180
Activate 170
447
Configuring 182
Enabling
181
Stop Sharing 182
Taking Images 182
Shortcuts
Adding from Application
Scr
een 47
Adding fr
om Home Scre
en
48
Deleting from a Screen 48
Managing
47
Primary 40
SkyDrive 259
Smart Alar
m 204
Smart Practices While Driving
389
Smart Switch 22
Snooze
205
Repeat 204
SNS
118
Social Network
Adding Facebook Contacts
119
Resync 120
Social Networking
Adding Contacts Fr
om 118
Software Update
375
Song
Set As
232
Sound
Adapt Sound
323
Sounds
Hearing Aids
340
Turn Off All 340
Spam
144
Accessing Your Spam
Folder
144
Add a Phrase 140
, 143
Add Number
130
, 131,
135
Assigning Manually
142
Assigning Phone Numb
ers
142
Block Unknown Numbers
144
Block Unknown Senders
141
, 144
Email Addresses 151
,
157
Manually Add a Number
140
, 142
Match Criteria 143
Registering a P
hrase as
Spam 143
Settings 140
, 142
Spam Messages 129
Assigning
129
448
Speakerphone
Turning on and off
73
Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR) Certification
In
formation 385
Speed Dial
Changing an entry 68
Making a call
69
Removing an entry 69
Setting up entries 67
Standard
Limited Warranty
413
Standard Mode 323
Status Bar
30
Sub-Menus
Navigation 57
SugarSync 259
Switching to a Bluetooth
During a call
73
Swype 83
123ABC Mode 87
ABC Mode 86
Cellular Data 346
Entering Numbers 89
Entering Symbols 89
Entering Text 84
Keyboard Mode 86
Select Text Input Mode 86
Settings
344
SYM mode 86
System
Volume
320
System Tone
Settings
322
T
Task Manger
Overview
195
Text Boos
ter
Accessibility 225
Text Input
Met
hods
83
Text Input Method
Selecting
84
Text Templates 145
Create Your Own 145
Text To Speech
349
Text-to-speech
Configuration
349
Third-Party Applications 369
Time Zone
Selecting
375
Timer
Automati
c Answering
325
, 328
Tools
Camera
165
TrackPad
Configure
350
449
Transferring Large Files 183
,
305
Transferring Music Files 236
Translate
131
Translate Message Bubble
135
TTS 349
TTY Mode 334
Twitter
Predictive Text
344
U
UL Certified Travel Charger
395
Understanding Your Device
22
Back View 27
Display
29
Features 22
Front View 24
Home
38
Side Views 28
Unknown Nu
mbers
Blocking Messages 144
Unknown Sources 367
Unlock
Using Face
310
Using Voice 311
Unmounting
SD car
d
373
Usage
Battery
372
USB Connections
As Stor
age Device
284
USB Settings
As Storage Device 284
Use GPS Satellites 229
, 364
Use Wireless Networks 229
,
364
Using Favorites
Adding Favorites
221
V
Verify Apps 367
Vibrate
326
Activate/Deactivate for
Voicemail
333
Vibration
Create
332
Device 321
Video
Picture-In-Picture 263
Shar
ing Videos 262
Volume
320
Videos
Options
175
Voice Inpu
t
Recognition
348
450
Voice Search 266
, 348
Voice Typing
83
Configuring 347
Using
96
Voicemail 333
Accessing
21
Accessing from Another
Phone
21
Setting Up 20
Volume Settings
Adjusting
320
VPN
Adding
303
Settings 303
W
Wait 66, 105
Adding to a Contact
105
Wait dialing 66
Wallpaper
Assign Home
42
Home and Lock Screens
51
Wallpapers
Assigning fr
om Gallery
175
Changing Home Screen
50
Changing Lock Screen 52
Changing via Settings
Menu
51
Managing 50
Warranty In
formation 413
WatchON
266
Adding a New Room 272
Changing Channels 270
Configure Just For
You
272
Customizing Your Remote
268
Initial Configuration 267
Locating Programs 271
Personalize
272
Settings 271
Using 270
Web
216
History 223
Web applications
enable downloading
282
Widget
Adding Widgets
41
Widgets
Adding and Removing
49
Moving to a Different
Screen
50
Settings 261
Stopwatch 206
451
Wi-Fi
About
284
Activating 285
, 291
Advanced settings 288
Connecting to
285
Deactivating 287
Direct Connection 295
During Sleep 292
MAC Address 293
Manu
ally Adding Network
293
Manually scan for network
287
Off
287
On 181
, 285, 287, 291
Settings
291
Show Usage 300
Status icons 286
Wi-Fi Direct 295
Activate and Connect 296
Device Name 19
On
181
, 296
World Clock
DST Sett
ings
205
WPS PIN
Pairing
295
WPS Push Butt
on
Connect 294
Pairing 294
Y
YouTube
High Quality
275
Settings 273
452
